Nec Storage Manager Is007 10E Users Manual Configuration Setting Tool User's (GUI)

IS007-10E to the manual 38b7b0f4-d8c4-4f31-974c-4af08d29023f

2015-01-24

: Nec Nec-Storage-Manager-Is007-10E-Users-Manual-331453 nec-storage-manager-is007-10e-users-manual-331453 nec pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 340

DownloadNec Nec-Storage-Manager-Is007-10E-Users-Manual- Storage Manager Configuration Setting Tool User's Manual (GUI)  Nec-storage-manager-is007-10e-users-manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
NEC Storage Manager

Configuration Setting Tool
User’s Manual (GUI)

IS007-10E

© NEC Corporation 2001-2004
No part of the contents of this book may be reproduced or
transmitted in any form without permission of NEC Corporation.
The contents of this book may be modified without notice in the future.

Preface
This manual describes how to perform the following by using the GUI (Graphical User Interface) on NEC Storage
Manager clients:
•

Configure the NEC Storage series disk array subsystem.

•

Refer to the disk array configuration information.

Remarks: The LD Administrator (ReallocationControl) and CachePartitioning are described in the “NEC Storage
Manager LD Administrator User’s Manual (IS037)” and “NEC Storage Manager Cache Partitioning User’s
Manual (IS038)”, respectively, from the NEC Storage Manager Ver3.3.
It is also possible to use the CLI (Command Line Interface) to configure the disk array subsystem or refer to the
configuration information.

For details, refer to the “NEC Storage Manager Configuration Setting Tool User’s

Manual” (IS002).
As its readers, this manual is aimed at those who have professional knowledge of the disk array subsystem.

For

information on the disk array subsystem functions, refer to the “NEC Storage Manager User’s Manual” (IS004) or
“NEC Storage Manager User’s Manual (UNIX)” (IS001) in accordance with your OS.
Refer to the “NEC Storage Manager Manual Guide” (IS901) for the overview of NEC Storage and the related
manuals.
Remarks 1. This manual explains functions implemented by the following program products:
• NEC Storage Manager and NEC Storage BaseProduct
• NEC Storage AccessControl
• NEC Storage DynamicDataReplication
• NEC Storage ReallocationControl
• NEC Storage RemoteDataReplication
2. This manual is applicable to the program products of the following versions:
• NEC Storage Manager Ver3.3
• NEC Storage BaseProduct Ver3.3
3. The NEC Storage Manager is referred to as iSM or Storage Manager in the text of this manual.
Also, the NEC Storage series disk array subsystem is referred to as a disk array.
4. The following descriptions in the text of this manual refer to the corresponding products.
Description
Corresponding Product
Storage Manager

NEC Storage Manager

AccessControl

NEC Storage AccessControl

DynamicDataReplication

NEC Storage DynamicDataReplication

ReallocationControl

NEC Storage ReallocationControl

RemoteDataReplication

NEC Storage RemoteDataReplication

5. The following descriptions in the text of this manual refer to the corresponding manuals.
Description
Corresponding Manual
User's Manual (UNIX)

NEC Storage Manager User's Manual (UNIX) (IS001)

User's Manual

NEC Storage Manager User's Manual (IS004)

Data Replication User's Manual
(Function Guide)

NEC Storage Manager Data Replication User's Manual
(Function Guide) (IS015)

Snapshot User's Manual (Function
Guide)

NEC Storage Manager Snapshot User's Manual (Function
Guide) (IS030)

6. Trademarks and registered trademarks
• HP-UX is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Co. in the United States.
• UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.
• Microsoft® and Windows® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
• Solaris is a trademark or a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and
other countries.
• Linux is a trademark or registered trademark of Mr. Linus Torvalds in the United States and other
countries.
Other product names and company names, etc. are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
associated companies.
7. In this document, matters to which careful attention needs to be paid will be described as follows:
Be sure to observe the contents.
If the indications are ignored and the system is improperly operated, settings which have been already
made might be affected.
Type of Indication
Type

Description
Describes contents which require special attention during operation.

Describes limitations to operation and similar information.

The First Edition in October 2001
The Tenth Edition in November 2004

Contents
Part I Overview..................................................................................................................................................I-1
Chapter 1
Storage Overview............................................................................................................................................I-2
1.1
Disk Array ................................................................................................................................................................ I-2
1.2
Disk Array Configuration......................................................................................................................................... I-4
Chapter 2
Overview of Disk Array Configuration Setting .........................................................................................I-21
2.1
Pool and RANK...................................................................................................................................................... I-22
2.1.1
Basic Pool ....................................................................................................................................................... I-23
2.1.2
Dynamic Pool ................................................................................................................................................. I-24
2.1.3
RANK............................................................................................................................................................. I-28
2.2
Logical Disk ........................................................................................................................................................... I-29
2.3
Spare ....................................................................................................................................................................... I-30
2.4
Nickname................................................................................................................................................................ I-30
Chapter 3
Overview of AccessControl..........................................................................................................................I-32
3.1
LD Set..................................................................................................................................................................... I-33
3.2
WWN Mode ........................................................................................................................................................... I-35
3.3
Port Mode ............................................................................................................................................................... I-37
Part II Installation.............................................................................................................................................II-1
Chapter 4
Configuration Setting and Access Control Installation ............................................................................ II-2
4.1
System Configuration..............................................................................................................................................II-2
4.2
Configuration Setting and AccessControl Installation ............................................................................................II-2
Part III Application ..........................................................................................................................................III-1
Chapter 5
Operation Procedures .................................................................................................................................III-2
5.1
Initial Installation .................................................................................................................................................. III-2
5.1.1
Setting the Storage Manager.......................................................................................................................... III-3
5.1.2
Setting a Disk Array ...................................................................................................................................... III-3
5.1.3
Binding a Pool or RANK............................................................................................................................... III-3
5.1.4
Binding a Logical Disk.................................................................................................................................. III-4
5.1.5
Setting a Logical Disk Nickname.................................................................................................................. III-4
5.1.6
Installing the Access Control......................................................................................................................... III-4
5.2
Physical Disk Expansion ....................................................................................................................................... III-5
5.2.1
Binding and Expanding a Pool or RANK ..................................................................................................... III-5
5.2.2
Binding a Logical Disk.................................................................................................................................. III-6
5.2.3
Changing the Access Control Configuration................................................................................................. III-6
5.3
Logical Disk Configuration Changing .................................................................................................................. III-7
5.3.1
Deassigning a Logical Disk........................................................................................................................... III-8
5.3.2
Unbinding a Logical Disk.............................................................................................................................. III-8
5.3.3
Unbinding a Pool or RANK .......................................................................................................................... III-8
5.3.4
Binding a Pool or RANK............................................................................................................................... III-8
5.3.5
Binding a Logical Disk.................................................................................................................................. III-9
5.3.6
Changing the Access Control Configuration................................................................................................. III-9
5.4
Access Control Installation ................................................................................................................................. III-10
5.4.1
Stopping the Server ..................................................................................................................................... III-11
5.4.2
Setting a Disk Array .................................................................................................................................... III-11
5.4.3
Setting the Port Access Mode...................................................................................................................... III-11
5.4.4
Creating an LD Set ...................................................................................................................................... III-11
5.4.5
Linking an LD Set and Path ........................................................................................................................ III-11
5.4.6
Assigning a Logical Disk ............................................................................................................................ III-11
5.4.7
Starting the Access Control ......................................................................................................................... III-12

i

5.4.8
Starting the Server ....................................................................................................................................... III-12
5.5
Server Expansion................................................................................................................................................. III-13
5.5.1
Setting the Port Access Mode...................................................................................................................... III-14
5.5.2
Creating an LD Set ...................................................................................................................................... III-14
5.5.3
Linking an LD Set and Path ........................................................................................................................ III-14
5.5.4
Assigning a Logical Disk ............................................................................................................................ III-14
5.5.5
Restarting the Server ................................................................................................................................... III-14
5.6
Access Control Configuration Changing............................................................................................................. III-15
5.6.1
Stopping the Server ..................................................................................................................................... III-16
5.6.2
Deassigning a Logical Disk......................................................................................................................... III-16
5.6.3
Deleting an LD Set ...................................................................................................................................... III-16
5.6.4
Creating an LD Set ...................................................................................................................................... III-16
5.6.5
Setting/Changing Link between an LD Set and Path .................................................................................. III-16
5.6.6
Assigning a Logical Disk ............................................................................................................................ III-16
5.6.7
Restarting the Server ................................................................................................................................... III-16
Part IV Operations ......................................................................................................................................... IV-1
Chapter 6
Parameters ................................................................................................................................................... IV-2
6.1
Parameters ............................................................................................................................................................. IV-2
6.2
Operating Range.................................................................................................................................................... IV-6
Chapter 7
Disk Array Configuration Setting (S400/S1400/S2400/S2800) ................................................................ IV-7
7.1
Pool Binding.......................................................................................................................................................... IV-7
7.1.1
Binding a Pool ............................................................................................................................................... IV-8
7.1.2
Expanding Capacity of a Pool ..................................................................................................................... IV-21
7.1.3
Unbinding a Pool ......................................................................................................................................... IV-26
7.1.4
Renaming a Pool.......................................................................................................................................... IV-29
7.1.5
Changing Rebuild Time and Expansion Time of a Pool ............................................................................. IV-31
7.2
Method of Binding Logical Disks ....................................................................................................................... IV-34
7.2.1
Binding Logical Disks ................................................................................................................................. IV-35
7.2.2
Expanding Capacity of Logical Disks ......................................................................................................... IV-53
7.2.3
Unbinding Logical Disks............................................................................................................................. IV-56
7.2.4
Renaming a Logical Disk ............................................................................................................................ IV-58
7.2.5
Changing Time to Bind Logical Disks ........................................................................................................ IV-60
7.2.6
Logical Disk Batch Setting.......................................................................................................................... IV-62
7.3
Binding a Spare ................................................................................................................................................... IV-84
7.3.1
Binding a Spare ........................................................................................................................................... IV-84
7.3.2
Unbinding a Spare ....................................................................................................................................... IV-89
7.4
Explanation of Configuration Setting Screen...................................................................................................... IV-91
7.4.1
Logical Disk Binding List Screen ............................................................................................................... IV-91
7.4.2
Logical Disk Configuration Screen ............................................................................................................. IV-94
7.4.3
Pool List View ............................................................................................................................................. IV-95
7.4.4
Pool Information View ................................................................................................................................ IV-97
7.4.5
Spare List View ......................................................................................................................................... IV-100
7.4.6
Unused Disk List View.............................................................................................................................. IV-101
Chapter 8
Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300) .......................... IV-102
8.1
Binding a RANK ............................................................................................................................................... IV-102
8.1.1
RANK Bind ............................................................................................................................................... IV-104
8.1.2
RANK Unbind ........................................................................................................................................... IV-106
8.1.3
Expanding a RANK................................................................................................................................... IV-108
8.1.4
Setting RANK Rebuild Time .................................................................................................................... IV-110
8.2
Method of Binding Logical Disks ..................................................................................................................... IV-114
8.2.1
Binding Logical Disks ............................................................................................................................... IV-115
8.2.2
Unbinding Logical Disks........................................................................................................................... IV-119
8.2.3
Setting Logical Disk Bind Time................................................................................................................ IV-120
8.2.4
Logical Disk Batch Setting........................................................................................................................ IV-121
8.3
Binding a Spare ................................................................................................................................................. IV-132
8.3.1
Spare Bind ................................................................................................................................................. IV-133
8.3.2
Spare Unbind ............................................................................................................................................. IV-134
8.3.3
Spare Rebuilding Mode ............................................................................................................................. IV-135

ii

8.4
Setting the Port .................................................................................................................................................. IV-138
8.4.1
Expand LUN.............................................................................................................................................. IV-138
8.5
Special Settings ................................................................................................................................................. IV-139
8.5.1
Cross Call and Auto Assignment............................................................................................................... IV-140
8.5.2
Ownership.................................................................................................................................................. IV-141
8.6
Explanation of Configuration Setting Screen.................................................................................................... IV-143
8.6.1
RANK/Spare Screen.................................................................................................................................. IV-144
8.6.2
Logical Disk Screen................................................................................................................................... IV-149
Chapter 9
Configuration Setting (Common to All Units) ...................................................................................... IV-153
9.1
Nickname Setting .............................................................................................................................................. IV-153
9.1.1
Setting a Disk Array Name........................................................................................................................ IV-154
9.1.2
Setting a Port Name................................................................................................................................... IV-156
9.1.3
Renaming a Pool........................................................................................................................................ IV-157
9.1.4
Renaming a Logical Disk .......................................................................................................................... IV-157
9.1.5
Nickname Batch Setting ............................................................................................................................ IV-158
9.2
Platform ............................................................................................................................................................. IV-161
9.3
Network ............................................................................................................................................................. IV-163
9.4
License............................................................................................................................................................... IV-169
9.5
Setting Disk Array Time ................................................................................................................................... IV-171
9.6
Getting Log in the Disk Array........................................................................................................................... IV-174
9.7
Getting Configuration Information.................................................................................................................... IV-175
9.7.1
Getting Configuration Information in Text Format................................................................................... IV-175
9.7.2
Getting Configuration Information in CSV Format .................................................................................. IV-177
9.8
Replication Pair Batch Setting .......................................................................................................................... IV-179
Chapter 10 Access Control Operations ..................................................................................................................... IV-182
10.1
Changing the Port Mode................................................................................................................................ IV-182
10.2
Setting LD Sets.............................................................................................................................................. IV-185
10.2.1 Setting an LD Set....................................................................................................................................... IV-186
10.2.2 Linking an LD Set and Path ...................................................................................................................... IV-188
10.2.3 Changing the LD Set Name....................................................................................................................... IV-193
10.2.4 Deleting an LD Set .................................................................................................................................... IV-195
10.3
Assigning a Logical Disk .............................................................................................................................. IV-197
10.3.1 Assigning a Logical Disk Newly............................................................................................................... IV-197
10.3.2 Assigning an Additional Logical Disk ...................................................................................................... IV-201
10.3.3 Deassigning a Logical Disk....................................................................................................................... IV-205
10.4
Starting the Access Control ........................................................................................................................... IV-207
10.5
Access Control Screen................................................................................................................................... IV-209
10.5.1 Access Control Setting Screen .................................................................................................................. IV-209
10.5.2 Access Control Start/Mode Change Screen............................................................................................... IV-220
10.5.3 Access Control Setting Confirmation Screen............................................................................................ IV-222
Appendix A Specifications......................................................................................................................................................1
A.1
Specified Number of Disk Arrays to Be Set ...............................................................................................................1
A.2
Number of LD Sets Locatable in One Disk Array ......................................................................................................1
A.3
Specified Number of Paths to Be Set for LD Set ........................................................................................................1
A.4
Number of LDs Locatable in One LD Set...................................................................................................................2
A.5
Notes on Binding a Pool..............................................................................................................................................2
Appendix B Configuration Setting Command .....................................................................................................................3
B.1
Network Relief Setting Command (iSMnetconf)........................................................................................................3
B.2
Start and Stop of Network Relief Setting Command ..................................................................................................4
B.2.1
Example of Displaying Options ..........................................................................................................................7
B.2.2
Setting File.........................................................................................................................................................10
Appendix C RAID .................................................................................................................................................................12
C.1
RAID .........................................................................................................................................................................12
C.2
List of RANK-Configurable RAID Types ................................................................................................................20
C.3
List of Pool-Configurable RAID Types ....................................................................................................................20

iii

Appendix D Notes on Use for Data Replication .................................................................................................................21
D.1
Notes on Binding Logical Disks................................................................................................................................21
D.2
Recommended RAID Configuration .........................................................................................................................23
D.3
Capacity Except Recommended RAID Configuration..............................................................................................24
D.3.1
Concept of Logical Disk Bind Capacity............................................................................................................24
D.3.2
Detailed Combination of RAID Configuration .................................................................................................28
D.3.3
Method of Specifying Configuration Setting ....................................................................................................29
Appendix E Logical Disk Used Capacity ............................................................................................................................32
Appendix F Batch Setup File ...............................................................................................................................................35
F.1
Nickname Setting File ...............................................................................................................................................35
F.2
Pair Setting File .........................................................................................................................................................39
Appendix G ACOS-4 Resource Operation Guard .............................................................................................................43
Index

...........................................................................................................................................................................47

iv

Part I Overview

Chapter 1 Storage Overview

Chapter 1 Storage Overview
This chapter describes the overview of a disk array, which is the object of the iSM management.
iSM is the software for operating and maintaining the disk arrays.

To understand the iSM functions and to use

the iSM efficiently, first read through this chapter, then proceed to Chapter 2.

11..11 D
Diisskk A
Arrrraayy
The outline of the disk array which is the object of the iSM management is explained below.

(1) 4000 series
The 4000 series, high-end disk array, realizes high scalability (up to 10 extended cabinets can be
connected to a basic cabinet) and high availability (all components have redundancy) and
displays stable performance. Furthermore, it provides the function to replicate logical disks
(DynamicDataReplication and RemoteDataReplication) in and between disk arrays, which
enables backup and batch processing to be performed in parallel with the main function.

(2) 3000 series
The 3000 series, mid-range disk array that can handle key business, realizes high scalability (up
to 2 extended cabinets can be connected to a basic cabinet) and high availability (all components
have redundancy) and displays stable performance.

Furthermore, it supports functions

equivalent to all of the solutions (DynamicDataReplication, RemoteDataReplication, etc.)
provided by the 4000 series, the high-end disk array, thereby efficiently performing business.

(3) 2800 series
The 2800 series, mid-range disk array, realizes high scalability (up to 16 disk enclosures can be
added) and high availability (main components have redundancy).
In addition, it provides a function to replicate logical disks (DynamicDataReplication) in the
disk array, which enables effective backup and batch processing.
Furthermore, the 2800 series can supports an additional parity disk for the high reliability RAID
(RAID6) to secure the redundancy against an error in one physical disk.

I-2

Chapter 1 Storage Overview

(4) 2000 series
- S2100/S2200/S2300
S2100/S2200/S2300, mid-range disk array, realizes high scalability (up to 14 disk enclosures can
be extended) and high availability (main components have redundancy).

Furthermore, it

provides a function to replicate logical disks (DynamicDataReplication) in the disk array, which
enables effective backup and batch processing.
- S2400
S2400, mid-range disk array, realizes high scalability (up to 8 disk enclosures can be added) and
high availability (main components have redundancy).

In addition, it provides a function to

replicate logical disks (DynamicDataReplication, RemoteDataReplication) in and between disk
arrays, which enables effective backup and batch processing.
Furthermore, this version can support an additional parity disk for the high reliability RAID
(RAID6) to secure the redundancy against an error in one physical disk.

(5) 1000 series
- S1100/S1200/S1300
S1100/S1200/S1300, a low-end model disk array, realizes the little space consuming (one
controller and maximum of 15 PDs may be loaded per 3U) and high availability (main
components have redundancy).
- S1400
S1400, a low-end model disk array, realizes space saving (one controller and a maximum of 15
PDs may be installed per 3U) and high availability (main components have redundancy).

In

addition, it provides a function to replicate logical disks (DynamicDataReplication) in the disk
array, which enables effective backup and batch processing.
Furthermore, this version can support an additional parity disk for the high reliability RAID
(RAID6) to secure the redundancy against an error in one physical disk.

(6) 100 series
- S100
The 100 series, entry model disk array designed for Windows/Linux, realizes space saving (one
controller and a maximum of 15 PDs may be installed per 3U) and high availability (main
components have redundancy).
- S400
S400, entry model disk array designed for Windows/Linux, realizes space saving (one controller
and a maximum of 15 PDs may be installed per 3U) and high availability (main components have
redundancy).
Furthermore, this version can support an additional parity disk for the high reliability RAID
(RAID6) to secure the redundancy against an error in one physical disk.

I-3

Chapter 1 Storage Overview

11..22 D
Diisskk A
Arrrraayy C
Co
on
nffiig
gu
urraattiio
on
n
(1) Components
The disk array is composed of Disk Array Controller (DAC), which carries the component of
control systems, such as host director, disk director and cache, and Disk Enclosure (DE) that
carries two or more Physical Disks controlled by DAC.

Array Group 2

Array Group 0

Array Group 1

(up to 10 cabinets)
Figure 1-1 Disk Array Composition (4000 Series)

I-4

Chapter 1 Storage Overview

Array Group 2

Array Group 0

Array Group 1

(up to 2 cabinets)
Figure 1-2 Disk Array Composition (3000 Series)

Figure 1-3

Disk Array Composition (2000/2800 Series)

Disk Enclosure (DE)
Disk Array Controller (DAC)
Physical Disk (PD)
Figure 1-4

Disk Array Composition (100/1000 Series)

I-5

Chapter 1 Storage Overview


In the 3000/4000 series disk array, the cabinet composed of Disk Array Controller and two or more disk
enclosures is called as “Basic Cabinet (BC)” and the cabinet that is composed of multiple disk
enclosures to be connected to basic cabinet is called as “Extended Cabinet (EC)”. The 3000/4000
series disk array can mount 10 or 15 Physical Disks (PDs) per disk enclosure, and 4 disk enclosures are
managed as 1 group (array group).

Individual PD has identification number per PD management

group (PD group) that includes the above 4 array groups.

Thus the combination of PD group number

and PD position number enables identifying of the physical mounting place of the PDs.
In the same way, unique identification number is assigned to other components in disk enclosure
(shown below), per controller unit, and this identification number enables components in the same disk
enclosure to be specified. But assignment of identification number depends on number of component in
disk enclosure.
The 2800 series disk array is composed of Disk Array Controller (DAC) and one or more disk
enclosures.

(There has no concept of basic cabinet and extended cabinet as in the 4000 series). It

can mount 15 physical disks (PDs) per disk enclosure. Only one PD management group (PD group) is
defined in it (i.e., all physical disks belong to one PD group).

There is no concept of array group.

The 2000 series disk array is composed of Disk Array Controller (DAC) and one or more disk
enclosures.

(There has no concept of basic cabinet and extended cabinet as in the 4000 series). It

can mount 10 or 15 Physical Disks (PDs) per disk enclosure.

PD management group (PD group) is

defined depending on the connection relation to disk array controller.

(PDs connected to the same

group are defined as one PD group) There is no concept of array group.
In the 100/1000 series disk array, Disk Array Controller (DAC) and DE which are in different cabinets
in the 2000 series are put in the same cabinet.
Controller (DAC).

15 Physical Disks (PDs) can be carried in Disk Array

Because there is not the concept of array group, the Physical Disks connected to

the same group are managed as one group (PD group).

I-6

Chapter 1 Storage Overview

<4000 series>
FC Port

HD HD

FC Port

Back Board

HD RD
HD

Cache
Module

Cache
Module

Battery
DD DD

DD

RD HD

Fan

DD

DD DD

Power Supply
Junction Box
Junction Box

PD

ETHER Port for
Monitoring

Disk Array
Controller (DAC)
SVP

ETHER Port
for Monitoring

Adapter Card
PD

Fan

PD

PD

Disk
Enclosure

PD
TEMP
ALM

Power Supply
Junction Box
Junction Box

Back Board

SVP

Panel

Battery

Adapter Card
PD

HD HD
HD
TEMP
ALM

<3000 series>
FC Port

HD

FC Port

RD

Back Board

DD DD

DD

Fan

PD

Back Board

SVP
TEMP
ALM

DD DD

Power Supply
Junction Box
Junction Box

DD

ETHER Port
for Monitoring

Disk Array
Controller (DAC)

Panel

Battery

Adapter Card
PD

HD

Cache
Module

Cache
Module
Battery

RD

SVP

ETHER Port for
Monitoring

Adapter Card
PD

Fan

PD

PD

Power Supply
Junction Box
Junction Box

Figure 1-5

PD
TEMP
ALM

3000/4000 Series Disk Array Components

I-7

Disk Enclosure

Chapter 1 Storage Overview

<2800 series>
FC Port

FC Port

HD (HostDirector)

HD (HostDirector)

Cache Module

Cache Module
Fan

Battery

Battery
TEMP
ALM

Power Supply

PD

Back Board

UPS Port

SVP

Disk Array
Controller (DAC)

SVP

Ether Port for
Monitoring

AdapterCard

AdapterCard

PD

PCC

PD

PD

Fan

PD

TEMP
ALM

Power Supply

Figure 1-6

PD

2800 Series Disk Array Components

I-8

Disk Enclosure

Chapter 1 Storage Overview

<2000 series>
- S2100/S2200/S2300
FC Port

FC Port

HD (Host Director)

HD (Host Director)

Cache Module
Fan

Battery

Battery
TEMP
ALM

Power Supply

PD

SVP

Ether Port for
Monitoring

Adapter Card

Adapter Card

PD

Disk Array
Controller (DAC)

Cache Module

PD

Back Board

PD

Fan

PD

Disk Enclosure

PD
TEMP
ALM

Power Supply

- S2400
FC Port

FC Port

HD (HostDirector)

HD (HostDirector)

Cache Module

Cache Module
Fan

Battery

Battery
TEMP
ALM

Power Supply

PD

Back Board

UPS Port

SVP

Disk Array
Controller (DAC)

SVP

Ether Port for
Monitoring

AdapterCard

AdapterCard

PD

PCC

PD

PD

Fan

PD

TEMP
ALM

Power Supply

Figure 1-7

PD

2000 Series Disk Array Components

I-9

Disk Enclosure

Chapter 1 Storage Overview

<100/1000 series>
- S100/S1100/S1200/S1300

FC Port

FC Port

HD (Host Director)

HD(HostDirector)
SVP

Cache Module

Battery

Battery

Cache Module

TEMP
ALM

Fan
PD

PD

PD

PD

ETHER Port for
Monitoring
Disk Array
Controller (DAC)

PD

PD

Power Supply

Back Board

- S400/S1400
FC Port

FC Port

HD (HostDirector)

Cache Module

HD (HostDirector)

Battery

Battery

Cache Module

PD

PD

PD

PD

Power Supply

SVP
SVP

Back Board

Figure 1-8

PD

100/1000 Series Disk Array Components

I-10

UPS Port
Disk Array

TEMP
ALM

Fan
PD

PPC

Controller (DAC)

Ether Port for
Monitoring

Chapter 1 Storage Overview

[2800 series logical block diagram (with alternative paths and options)]

FC Port

FC Port

Alternative Paths

PD Group 0

Controller 0

Controller 1

Option

Option

PD group 0
DE#0[00 - 0E]
DE#1[10 - 1E]
:
:
:
DE#E[E0 - EE]
DE#F[F0 - FE]
*1 The 2800 series disk array has one PD group.
*2 Hexadecimal digits in the brackets are PD numbers.
*3 DE denotes a disk enclosure.
*4 PD group 0 and PD group 0’ are the same PD group.
Figure 1-9 2800 Series Logical Block Diagram

I-11

PD Group 0’

Controller Block

Chapter 1 Storage Overview

[2000 series logical block diagram]
- S2100/S2200/S2300 (with alternative paths and options)
FC Port

FC Port

Alternative Paths
Controller 1

PD Group 0

Controller 0

Option
Option

PD Group 0'

Controller Block

PD Group 1

PD Group 1'

Option

PD group 0

PD group 1

DE#0[00 – 0E]
DE#1[10 – 1E]
DE#2[20 – 2E]
DE#3[30 – 3E]
DE#4[40 – 4E]
DE#5[50 – 5E]
DE#6[60 – 6E]

DE#10[00 – 0E]
DE#11[10 – 1E]
DE#12[20 – 2E]
DE#13[30 – 3E]
DE#14[40 – 4E]
DE#15[50 – 5E]
DE#16[60 – 6E]

*1

The 2000 series disk array has two PD groups.

*2

Hexadecimal digits in the brackets are PD numbers.

*3

“DE” denotes a disk enclosure.

*4

PD groups 0 and 0’ are the same PD group, and also PD groups 1 and 1’ are the same PD group.

Figure 1-10

2000 Series (S2100/S2200/S2300) Logical Block Diagram

I-12

Chapter 1 Storage Overview

[2000 series logical block diagram]
- S2400 (with alternative paths)
FC Port

FC Port

Controller Block

Alternative Paths
Controller 1

PD Group 0

PD Group 0'

Controller 0

PD group 0
DE#0[00 – 0E]
DE#1[10 – 1E]
DE#4[40 – 4E]
DE#5[50 – 5E]
DE#8[80 – 8E]
DE#9[90 – 9E]
DE#C[C0 – CE]
DE#D[D0 – DE]

*1 S2400 has only one PD group.
*2

Hexadecimal digits in the brackets are PD numbers.

*3

“DE” denotes a disk enclosure.

*4

PD groups 0 and 0’ are the same PD group.
Figure 1-11

2000 Series (S2400) Logical Block Diagram

I-13

Chapter 1 Storage Overview

[100/1000 series logical block diagram (with alternative paths)]
- S100/S1100/S1200/S1300 (with alternative paths)
FC Port

FC Port

Controller Block

Alternative Paths

Controller 1

PD Group 0

PD Group 0'

Controller 0

PD group 0
DE#0[00 – 0E]
DE#1[10 – 1E]

*1

S100/S1100/S1200/S1300 disk array has only one PD group.

*2

Hexadecimal digits in the brackets are PD numbers.

*3

“DE” denotes a disk enclosure.

*4

PD group 0 and PD group 0’ are the same PD group.
Figure 1-12

100/1000 Series (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300) Logical Block Diagram

I-14

Chapter 1 Storage Overview

[100/1000 series logical block diagram (with alternative paths)]
- S400/S1400 (with alternative paths)

FC Port

FC Port

Controller Block

Alternative Paths

Controller 1

PD Group 0

PD Group 0'

Controller 0

PD group 0
DE#0[00 – 0E]
DE#4[40 – 4E]
DE#8[80 – 8E]
DE#C[C0 – CE]

*1 S400/S1400 disk array has only one PD group.
*2

Hexadecimal digits in the brackets are PD numbers.

*3

“DE” denotes a disk enclosure.

*4

PD group 0 and PD group 0’ are the same PD group.

*5

S400 cannot be connected to DE#C.
Figure 1-13

100/1000 Series (S400/S1400) Logical Block Diagram

I-15

Chapter 1 Storage Overview


Disk array components are shown below.
Table 1-1 Component List (1/2)
Configuration Devices
(Abbreviation)

Component (Abbreviation)
Disk Array Controller

Description

Host Director (HD)

Host interface control and cache module
control device. One to four ports are
mounted in single director.

Replication Director (RD)

Control part of DynamicDataReplication and
RemoteDataReplication function. Two ports
are mounted in single director.

Disk Director (DD)

Disk array control device. Four ports are
mounted in single director.

Cache Module Card (CHE)

Cache memory

Service Processor Card (SVP)

Processing part that provides various interfaces
(maintenance PC, Ether, modem, SCBI) to
perform power supply control and
maintenance.

Temperature Alarm

Temperature abnormality detection part with
temperature sensor, in DAC (Disk Array
Controller).

(DAC)

(DAC_TEMP_ALM)

External panel composed of status display part
of disk array, and system power on/off
switches.

Panel
(PANEL)

(DAC_FANU/FANL)

Cooling fan to maintain the constant
temperature inside of the controller. There
are two types: Upper and Lower.

Power Supply

Power supply part in DAC.

Fan

(DAC_PS)
Power supply part to hold data of cache
module in DAC.

Battery Backup Unit
(DAC_BBU)
Basic Cabinet Junction Box
(BC_JB)

Connection part of AC power cable in the
basic cabinet. It supplies electric power for
components (configuration devices) of cabinet.

(DAC_BB)

Back board connecting each component
(configuration devices) in DAC.

Power Control Card (PCC)

Power control part.

Back Board

I-16

Chapter 1 Storage Overview

Table 1-1 Component List (2/2)
Configuration Devices
(Abbreviation)

Component (Abbreviation)
Disk Enclosure

Power Supply

(DE)

(DE_PS)

Description

Power supply part in DE (Disk Enclosure).
Cooling fan in DE to maintain the constant
temperature inside of the unit.

Fan
(DE_FAN)

Adapter Card for connection between PD
and DD.

Adapter Card
(DE_ADP)
Extended Cabinet Junction Box
(EC_JB)

Connection part of AC power cable in the
extended cabinet. It supplies electric
power to components (configuration
devices) of cabinet.
Temperature abnormality detection part
with temperature sensor in DE.

Temperature Alarm
(DE_TEMP_ALM)

Back board connecting each component
(configuration devices) in DE.

Back Board
(DE_BB)
Pool

Virtual medium composing RAID by
putting multiple physical disks together.

Physical Disk (PD)

Physical Disk

Logical Disk (LD)

Logical Disk (disk from operation host
side)

I-17

Chapter 1 Storage Overview

(2) Logical configuration of a disk array
In a disk array, put multiple physical disks together to set up a virtual medium to compose RAID,
and partition the space in the virtual medium to make logical disks.

Data on the logical disks is

stored into the areas of physical disk associated with the partitions on the virtual medium in which
the logical disks are composed.
The virtual medium is called a pool or RANK, and it supports different logical disk configurations
depending on the disk array.
• Pool
Disk arrays with pool
*The disk arrays with pool are the following:
S400/S1400/S2400/S2800
In the disk array indicated above, multiple physical disks put together to make up a virtual
medium for RAID is called a pool.

The logical disks usually belong to one pool, and the

required amount of space is assigned from the pool.
There are two types of pool available as described below. They function in different manners.
Basic pool
The basic pool is a virtual medium, which manages the space on the pool using a continuous
address space.
As you handle logical disks on RANK, assign the continuous space on the pool to the logical
disks.

In addition, like a multi-RANK configuration, the basic pool supports a striping

configuration for distributing and storing data into multiple RAID configurations.
For the practical configurations of physical disks that bind a basic pool, refer to C.3 “List of
Pool-Configurable RAID Types”.
Note that the basic pool does not allow using any additional features such as pool capacity
expansion or logical disk capacity expansion.

I-18

Chapter 1 Storage Overview

Dynamic pool
The dynamic pool is a virtual medium, which manages the space on the pool using a virtual
storage space.
Like block management in a file system, the dynamic pool manages used space and unused
space.

When making up logical disks, separate unused space from the pool according to the

required capacity, then assign the physical disk space corresponding to the logical disk space.
The dynamic pool moderates the limit on the number of constituent physical disks and enables
flexible configurations.

In addition, the dynamic pool allows to use additional features such as

pool capacity expansion and logical disk capacity expansion.

For details on the dynamic pool,

refer to 2.1.2 “Dynamic Pool”.
For the practical configurations of physical disks on a dynamic pool, refer to C.3 “List of
Pool-Configurable RAID Types”.

Logical Disk Configuration of Basic Pool
Basic Pool

LD00
LD01
LD02
LD03
PD01

PD00

PD02

PD03

PD04

Logical Disk Configuration of Basic Pool (Striping)
Basic Pool

...

PD00

PD01

PD02

PD03

LD00
LD01
LD02
LD03

PD04

Logical Disk Configuration of Dynamic Pool
Dynamic Pool

LD00

LD02
LD03

LD01
PD00

PD01
Figure 1-14

PD02

PD03

PD04

Logical Configurations of Disk Arrays (Pool)

I-19

...

PDnn

Chapter 1 Storage Overview

• RANK

Other than disk arrays with pool
In the disk arrays indicated above, multiple physical disks put together to make up a virtual
medium for RAID is called RANK.

Areas on RANK are controlled by using a continuous

address space.
The logical disks usually belong to one RANK, and a continuous space on one RANK is
assigned to them.
In a multi-RANK configuration, the logical disks belong to multiple RANKs, and continuous
spaces on the multiple RANKs are assigned to them.
For the types of RAID configurable as RANK, refer to C.2 “List of RANK-Configurable RAID
Types”.

Logical Disk Configuration of RANK

RANK
LD00
LD01
LD02
LD03
PD00

PD01

PD02

PD03

PD04

Logical Disk Configuration of RANK (Striping)

RANK

...

RANKn
LD00
LD01
LD02
LD03

PD00

PD01
Figure 1-15

PD02

PD03

PD04

Logical Configurations of Disk Arrays (RANK)

I-20

Chapter 2 Overview of Disk Array Configuration Setting

Chapter 2 Overview of Disk Array
Configuration Setting
This chapter describes an overview of the disk array configuration setting.
The disk array configuration setting is a function for setting the configuration when initializing the disk array and
when extending the physical disks.

This operation can be performed by using a GUI from the iSM client.

Administrator

Storage Manager

Configuration Display Screen
Logical Disk

Disk Array
Controller (DAC)
Disk Array
Figure 2-1

Configuration Setting Outline

I-21

Physical
Disk
Disk Enclosure (DE)

Chapter 2 Overview of Disk Array Configuration Setting

22..11 P
Po
oo
oll aan
nd
dR
RA
AN
NK
K
In a disk array, put multiple physical disks together to set up a virtual medium to compose RAID, and
partition the space in the virtual medium to make logical disks. Data on the logical disks is stored into
the areas of physical disk associated with the partitions on the virtual medium in which the logical disks
are composed.
The virtual medium is called a pool or RANK, and it supports different logical disk configurations
depending on the disk array.
• Pool

S400/S1400/S2400/S2800
In the disk array indicated above, multiple physical disks put together to make up a virtual medium
for RAID is called a pool. The logical disks usually belong to one pool, and the required amount of
space is assigned from the pool.
• RANK

Other than S400/S1400/S2400/S2800
In the disk arrays indicated above, multiple physical disks put together to make up a virtual medium
for RAID is called RANK. Areas on RANK are controlled by using a continuous address space.
There are two types of pool available as described below. They function in different manners.

I-22

Chapter 2 Overview of Disk Array Configuration Setting

22..11..11 B
Baassiicc P
Pooooll
The basic pool is a virtual medium, which manages the space on the pool using a continuous address
space.
As you handle logical disks on RANK, assign the continuous space on the pool to the logical disks.

In

addition, like a multi-RANK configuration, the basic pool supports a striping configuration for
distributing and storing data into multiple RAID configurations.
Note that the basic pool does not allow using any additional features such as pool capacity expansion or
logical disk capacity expansion.

Logical Disk Configuration of Basic Pool
Basic Pool

LD00
LD01
LD02
LD03
PD00

PD01

PD02

PD03

PD04

Logical Disk Configuration of Basic Pool (Striping)
Basic Pool

PD00

...

PD01

PD02

Figure 2-2

PD03

LD00
LD01
LD02
LD03

PD04

Logical Configuration of Disk Arrays (Basic Pool)

The table below shows the number of physical disks and the number of pools available by the RAID
type on S400/S1400/S2400/S2800.
- Basic pool
Disk Array

RAID Type

S400/S1400/
S2400/S2800

RAID1

Number of Physical Disks
2

4

5

8

10

16

20

{

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

{

-

-

-

-

RAID10

-

{

-

{

-

{

-

RAID50

-

-

-

-

{

-

{

RAID5

{:

Available -:

Unavailable

I-23

Chapter 2 Overview of Disk Array Configuration Setting

22..11..22 D
Dyynnaam
miicc P
Pooooll
The dynamic pool is a virtual medium, which manages the space on the pool using a virtual storage
space.
Like block management in a file system, the dynamic pool manages used space and unused space.
When making up logical disks, separate unused space from the pool according to the required capacity,
then assign the physical disk space corresponding to the logical disk space.
The dynamic pool moderates the limit on the number of constituent physical disks and enables flexible
configurations. In addition, the dynamic pool allows to use additional features such as pool capacity
expansion and logical disk capacity expansion.

Logical Disk Configuration of Dynamic Pool
Dynamic Pool

LD00
LD01
PD00

PD01

Figure 2-3

LD02
LD03
PD02

PD03

PD04

...

PDnn

Logical Configuration of Disk Arrays (Dynamic Pool)

S400/S1400/S2400/S2800 disk array supports the dynamic pool function.
The dynamic pool function puts a set of physical disks on the disk array together to make up a virtual
storage pool. That is, it picks up the amount of storage required for the transaction from space unused
in the pool and bind logical disks.

If the storage capacity becomes short, you can add physical disks

one by one as required and putting them into the pool to expand the unused space of the pool.

The

additional unused space of the pool can be used to bind a new logical disk or expand the existing logical
disk capacity, keeping the current data.

In addition, you can put back logical disks no longer needed

to the pool to extend the unused space of the pool.
Therefore, the dynamic pool function helps to manage the capacity of the storage efficiently and make a
large reduction in the cost on additional storage space.

It also helps to flexibly support any

configuration changes or expansion of the storage to be done for addition of new transactions or
modification to existing transactions.

I-24

Chapter 2 Overview of Disk Array Configuration Setting

Server

Add physical disks one by one as
required to the pool to expand the
available space.

Logical Disk

Create a new logical
disk.

Expand the existing
logical disk capacity,
keeping the current
data.

Physical Disk

Pool

Put back a logical disk
no longer needed to
the pool.

Disk Array

Figure 2-4

Overview of the Dynamic Pool Function

The dynamic pool function provides the following advantages:
• Reduction in the cost of storage expansion
When some additional storage space is required due to an addition of new transactions and so forth,
you can add physical disks one by one as required to bind a new logical disk or expand the logical
disk capacity at that time.

This means that you can add physical disks just enough for the required

capacity only with the least additional cost.
• Better flexibility of storage configuration
If the amount of data to be handled increases and the storage capacity becomes short, you can expand
the logical disk space, keeping the existing data in the logical disks.

In addition, returning logical

disks no longer needed to the pool secures the unused space of the pool which can be used for another
purpose.

With these features, you can flexibly support any configuration changes of storage to be

made for modification to existing transactions or operation of existing transactions.

I-25

Chapter 2 Overview of Disk Array Configuration Setting

(1) You can bind a dynamic pool:
You can bind a virtual storage space, or a dynamic pool, by selecting a set of unused physical
disks on the disk array. The RAID type usable and the number of physical disks required for a
dynamic pool are fixed.

Select either of the following two types of RAID6 configuration

according to the number of physical disks required.

The two types of configuration have

different capacity efficiencies:
RAID6 (4+PQ):

6 or more physical disks required (capacity efficiency: 67% approx.)

RAID6 (8+PQ):

10 or more physical disks required (capacity efficiency: 80%)

For details on how to bind a dynamic pool, refer to 7.1.1 “Binding a Pool” in Part IV
“Operations”.
y Dynamic pool
RAID Type
RAID6 (4+PQ)

Disk Array

Number of Physical Disks

S400/S1400/

6 to 60

S2400/S2800

(120 or 240)*1

RAID6 (8+PQ)

10 to 60
(120 or 240)*1

*1:

The maximum number of physical disks is 60 when pools are in use.
To use 61 or more disks, you need to add physical disks by extending dynamic pools.

(2) You can expand the dynamic pool capacity:
You can expand the capacity of the dynamic pool by selecting unused physical disks on the disk
array and putting them into the dynamic pool. The capacity actually added is the capacity of the
additional physical disk(s) multiplexed by the pool capacity efficiency.
disks one by one.

You can add physical

Naturally, you can add multiple physical disks at one time.

Usually, expanding the dynamic pool rebuilds data on the additional physical disk(s) to keep the
redundancy of RAID.

Rebuilding data puts some load to the physical disks of the dynamic pool

and influences access to the existing logical disks which belong to the pool.

The additional

space becomes available after the rebuild process finishes.
However, when the number of physical disks simultaneously added to the pool is a specified
number or more, the dynamic pool is expanded and made available without the rebuild process.
The additional space is usable immediately after the physical disks are added to the pool.
The RAID configuration cannot be changed from RAID6 (4+PQ) to RAID6 (8+PQ) or vise versa.
You need to add physical disks to the pool, keeping the RAID configuration.

I-26

Chapter 2 Overview of Disk Array Configuration Setting

For details on how to expand a dynamic pool, refer to 7.1.2 “Expanding Capacity of a Pool” in
Part IV “Operations”.
Additional
Physical Disks

Configuration

1 to 5

RAID6 (4+PQ)

1 to 9

RAID6 (8+PQ)

6 or more

RAID6 (4+PQ)

10 or more

RAID6 (8+PQ)

Rebuild after Expansion of Pool
The pool is rebound. Rebinding the pool influences
access to the existing logical disks which belong to
the pool. The additional space to the pool becomes
available after the rebind process finishes.
The pool is not rebound. The expansion of the pool
puts no influence on any existing logical disks which
belongs to it. The additional space to the pool
becomes available immediately after it is added.

(3) You can bind the logical disks:
You can pick up the amount of storage required from the unused space in the dynamic pool and
bind logical disks required for it.

For details on how to bind logical disks, refer to 7.2.1

“Binding Logical Disks” in Part IV, “Operations”.

(4) You can expand the logical disk capacity:
You can pick up the amount of storage required from the unused space in the dynamic pool and
increase the existing logical disk capacity. While data stored in the logical disks is secured,
some space usable for additional logical disks is added after the existing logical disks.

The way

of having the host identify the additional space depends on the platform.
For details on how to expand the logical disk capacity, refer to 7.2.2 “Expanding Capacity of
Logical Disks” in Part IV “Operations”.

Some platforms do not support expansion of logical disk capacity. For details about it, ask the
maintenance personnel.

In addition, in case of an error or failure, it is recommended to make a

backup of data stored in the existing logical disks before expanding the logical disk capacity.

I-27

Chapter 2 Overview of Disk Array Configuration Setting

22..11..33 R
RA
AN
NK
K
The logical disks usually belong to one RANK, and a continuous space on one RANK is assigned to
them.
In a multi-RANK configuration, the logical disks belong to multiple RANKs, and continuous spaces on
the multiple RANKs are assigned to them.

Logical Disk Configuration of RANK

RANK
LD00
LD01
LD02
LD03
PD00

PD01

PD02

PD03

PD04

Logical Disk Configuration of RANK (Striping)

RANK

...

RANKn
LD00
LD01
LD02
LD03

PD00

PD01

PD02

Figure 2-5

PD03

PD04

Logical Configurations of Disk Arrays (RANK)

The table below shows the number of physical disks and the number of RANKs available by the RAID
type on the 100/1000/2000 series (not including S400/S1400/S2400).
Number of Physical Disks
RAID
Type
RAID0
RAID1

Disk Array

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

100/1000/2000
series

{

-

{

-

{

-

-

-

-

{

-

-

-

-

{

-

{

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

RAID5

-

-

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

RAID10

-

-

-

{

-

{

-

{

-

{

-

{

-

{

-

{:

Available -:

Unavailable

I-28

Chapter 2 Overview of Disk Array Configuration Setting

22..22 L
Lo
og
giiccaall D
Diisskk
The logical disks in the disk array are equivalent to the physical disk when viewed from the OS.
the OS, this physical disk is partitioned to be managed as multiple logical disks.

In

In the disk array,

multiple physical disks are bound as a pool or RANK, which is then divided to form logical disks.

Disk Array
Physical Disks

Pool
or
RANK

OS
Physical Disks

Logical Disks

Logical Disks

The physical disk is
divided to form logical
disks.

Sam

Multiple physical disks
are bound to form a
pool or RANK.

The pool or RANK is
divided to form
logical disks.

Multiple physical disks are
used to form logical disks. *1

PD Group *2

PD Group

00

01

02

03

00

10

11

12

13

10

70

71

72

73

70

01
11

71

02
12

03
13

72

*3

Disk Enclosure (DE)

Physical Disks

73
Physical Disk Number

*4

*1

When the OS is used to support the volume group and the software RAID, etc.

*2

The PD group refers to a management aggregate of physical disks consisting of one or more DEs.

*3

The Disk Enclosure (DE) refers to a management aggregate of 10 to 15 physical disks.

*4 The physical disk number and the RANK number are given in terms of each PD group.
Figure 2-6

Physical Disks and Logical Disks

I-29

Chapter 2 Overview of Disk Array Configuration Setting

22..33 S
Sp
paarree
When binding pools or RANKs other than RAID0, data are still in the disks even when a single
physical disk (two physical disks for RAID6) fail(s). However, if one more physical disk fails, data
may be in danger of being lost.
To cope with this situation, the reliability of the disk array can be enhanced further by switching to a
reserve (i.e. Spare) disk which is set beforehand, at the point when a physical disk fails.
Spares can be set for physical disks which are not used in pool or RANK binding, thus making it
possible to recover data to a Spare in the same PD group when a physical disk fails.

When recovery to

Spares is started, the pool or RANK is rebuilt and the Spares become physical disks which comprise the
pool or RANK. The failed physical disk can be replaced without stopping the access to the disk array.
Considering the physical layout, it is normally desirable to set one spare disk per DE for the physical
disk in the rightmost slot in the DE.

22..44 N
Niicckkn
naam
mee
Nicknames refer to any names that can be set for the disk array, the logical disk, the port, and the pool
with regard to iSM’s management target.

Since the names thus set are stored in the disk array, they

are held regardless of whether iSM or a disk array is restarted or not.
(1)

Disk Array Name
Refers to any ID name for iSM’s management target disk array. When the disk array is
specified with iSM, the disk array name is used.

(2)

LD Name
Refers to any ID name for a logical disk in iSM’s management target disk array. When the
logical disk is specified with iSM, the LD name is used.

(3)

Port Name
Refers to any ID name for a port in iSM’s management target disk array. When the port is
specified with iSM, the port name is used.

(4)

Pool Name
Refers to any ID name for a pool in the iSM’s management target disk array. When the pool is
specified with iSM, the pool name is used.

I-30

Chapter 2 Overview of Disk Array Configuration Setting

Before operating the disk array, users can perform efficient management of the disk array by setting the
ID information with the nickname.

I-31

Chapter 3 Overview of AccessControl

Chapter 3 Overview of AccessControl
This section describes functions available when program product “AccessControl” is purchased. The
AccessControl is optional software.
The AccessControl provides functions to set and unset information on accessibility from the business server to
logical disks.
Using these functions enables users to easily and flexibly change configuration of logical disks and perform
accessibility setting.
Disk Array

Accessible Area
In Use from Business Server
LD Set

LD Set

Add/Delete of
logical disks
is possible.

Inaccessible Area
In Non-use from Business Server

AccessControl
function protects
LDs from
business server

[Preserve Group]

Figure 3-1

Overview of Access Control

y [Inaccessible area]
Logical disk groups hidden from the business server by using the AccessControl function exist in this area.
This area is called Preserve Group.
[Preserve Group] Logical disks hidden from the business server and inaccessible exist in this area. Contents of
the logical disks are retained and existing logical disks include logical disks with no special purpose settings,
logical disks set in pairs for replication (MV, RV), volume for snapshots (BV), and link-volume (LV).
y [Accessible area]
Logical disk groups accessible from the business server by using the AccessControl function exist in this area.
Contents of the logical disks depend on the business server, and existing logical disks include ordinary logical
disks with no special purpose settings, replication volume (MV, RV), volume for snapshots (BV), and
link-volume (LV).

In addition, each logical disk is assigned to an LD Set.

I-32

Chapter 3 Overview of AccessControl

33..11 L
LD
DS
Seett
The concept of “LD Set” is introduced to Access Control.

The concept of LD Set enables to assign

logical disks collectively to ports of multiple disk arrays and WWNs.

When one single business

server has multiple access paths and if its I/O paths are duplicated or it is clustered, define multiple
access paths together by using an LD Set.
For ports and WWNs defined as paths of an identical LD Set, Access Control can be collectively set.
That is, when you add or remove an LD Set after setting up Access Control, you can collectively handle
ports and WWNs with an LD Set specified.
When a disk array with the program product AccessControl(WWN) applied is in use, only WWNs can
be defined as paths of LD Sets.

I-33

Chapter 3 Overview of AccessControl

Business Server A
HBA0

Business Server B
HBA2

HBA1

WWN (WWPN)

Business Server C

HBA3

HBA4

WWN (WWPN)

Link between Path Information and LD Sets

Port Number
Port0

Port1

Port2

Port3

LD00

LD01

LD02

LD03

LD04

LD05

LD06

LD07

LD08

LD09

LD0a

LD0b

LD Set

LD Set

LD Set

WWN Mode
Figure 3-2

Schematic Diagram of AccessControl

I-34

Port Mode

Chapter 3 Overview of AccessControl

33..22 W
WW
WN
NM
Mo
od
dee
(1) Function
This function, which can set the accessible logical disk in terms of each business server HBA
(Host Bus Adaptor), can set whether the logical disk is accessible or not in terms of each server.
The HBA has the only ID code called WWN (World Wide Name).
WWN which allows access to logical disks.

I-35

Use this code to set the

Chapter 3 Overview of AccessControl

Business Server B

Business Server A
HBA0

HBA1

HBA2

HBA3

Switch

Port0

Business Server C

HBA4

Switch

Port2

Port1

Port3

LD00

LD06

LD02

LD03

LD04

LD05

LD01

LD07

LD08

LD09

LD0a

LD0b

Figure 3-3

Inaccessible from Any
Business Server

Accessible
from Server C

Accessible from
Server B

Accessible from
Server A

Schematic Diagram of AccessControl (WWN Mode)

Table 3-1 Setting WWN and Logical Disk Numbers
Logical Disk
No. 00
01
02 03 04 05 06 07

08

09

0a

0b

-

-

-

-

HBA
0

√

1

√

2

-

3

-

4

-

√

-

-

-

-

√

√

√

-

-

-

-

√

√

-

-

-

-

-

√

√

-

-

-

-

√

√

-

-

-

√

√

-

-

-

-

√

√

-

-

-

-

-

√

-

-

-

-

-

√

-

√: Sets HBA’s WWN and logical disk number as being accessible.
-: Sets HBA’s WWN and logical disk number as being inaccessible.
According to the settings above:
• Business server A can access logical disks LD00, LD01, LD06, and LD07.
• Business server B can access logical disks LD02, LD03, LD08, and LD09.

I-36

Chapter 3 Overview of AccessControl

• Business server C can access logical disks LD04 and LD0a.
• LD05 and LD0b cannot be accessed from any business server.
This function can divide the logical disks which bind the disk array into logical disk groups in
terms of each business server HBA (Host Bus Adaptor).

It can also restrict the access in terms of

each server, thus making possible data protection and security protection, etc.

(2) Setting
This mode can be set through the configuration setting screen of the iSM client.

33..33 P
Po
orrtt M
Mo
od
dee
(1) Function
This function, which can set the accessible logical disk in terms of each disk array port, allows the
access management for the logical disk in terms of each business server connected to each port of
the disk array.

I-37

Chapter 3 Overview of AccessControl

Business Server A
HBA0

Business Server B

HBA1

Port0

Business Server C

HBA2

Port1

HBA3

Port2

Port3

LD00

LD01

LD02

LD03

LD04

LD05

LD06

LD07

LD08

LD09

LD0a

LD0b

Accessible from Server
A

Figure 3-4

Accessible from Server
B

Accessible
from Server
C

Inaccessible from
Any Business
Server

Schematic Diagram of Access Control (Port Mode)

Table 3-2 Setting Port and Logical Disk Numbers
Logical
Disk No. 00
01
02 03 04 05 06 07

08

09

0a

0b

Port
Port0

√

√

-

-

-

-

√

√

-

-

-

-

Port1

√

√

-

-

-

-

√

√

-

-

-

-

Port2

-

-

√

√

-

-

-

-

√

√

-

-

Port3

-

-

-

-

√

-

-

-

-

-

√

-

√: Sets the port and logical disk number as being accessible.
-: Sets the port and logical disk number as being inaccessible.
According to the settings in Table 3-2:
• Business server A can access logical disks LD00, LD01, LD06 and LD07 through ports Port0
and Port1.
• Business server B can access logical disks LD02, LD03, LD08 and LD09 through port Port2.

I-38

Chapter 3 Overview of AccessControl

• Business server C can access logical disks LD04 and LD0a through port Port3.
• LD05 and LD0b cannot be accessed from any business server.
This function can divide the logical disks which bind the disk array into logical disk groups and
set whether to restrict the access or not in terms of each port.

Data protection and security

protection, etc. in terms of each business server connected to the port can be achieved through this
function.

(2) Setting
This mode can be set through the configuration setting screen of the iSM client.
For setting of a disk array with the program product AccessControl(WWN) in port mode, ask our
maintenance personnel.

I-39

Chapter 3 Overview of AccessControl

This page is intentionally left blank.

I-40

Part II Installation

Chapter 4 Configuration Setting and Access Control Installation

Chapter 4 Configuration Setting and Access
Control Installation
44..11 S
Syysstteem
mC
Co
on
nffiig
gu
urraattiio
on
n
For information on configuration settings and examples of system configuration when using Access Control function,
refer to Chapter 3 “System Configuration” of the “Manual Guide”.

44..22

C
Co
on
nffiig
gu
urraattiio
on
nS
Seettttiin
ng
g aan
nd
d
A
AcccceessssC
Co
on
nttrro
oll IIn
nssttaallllaattiio
on
n

Configuration Setting and Access Control functions are installed at the same time installing the iSM server.

For

information on installing and uninstalling, refer to “Server Installation” and “Client Installation” in the “User’s
Manual” or “User’s Manual (UNIX)” in accordance with the OS in use.

II-2

Part III Application

Chapter 5 Operation Procedures

Chapter 5
55..11

Operation Procedures
IIn
niittiiaall IIn
nssttaallllaattiio
on
n

When initially installing a system and a disk array, make the settings basically in accordance with the following
procedure.
Execute the following work while referring to the “User’s
Manual” or “User’s Manual (UNIX)” in accordance with

Set the Storage Manger

your OS.
• Install the iSM.
• Set the target disk array as a monitoring target.
• Set the user information.
If necessary, set a Disk Array.
Set a Disk Array

(For details, refer to

5.1.2 “Setting a Disk Array”.)

Bind a pool or RANK.
Bind a Pool or RANK

(For details, refer to 5.1.3

“Binding a Pool or RANK”.)

Bind a logical disk.

Bind a Logical Disk

(For details, refer to 5.1.4 “Binding

a Logical Disk”.)

Set a nickname of the logical disk.

Set a Logical Disk Nickname

(For details, refer to

5.1.5 “Setting a Logical Disk Nickname”.)

If necessary, newly install the Access Control.

Install the Access Control

(For

details, refer to 5.1.6 “Installing the Access Control”.)

III-2

Chapter 5 Operation Procedures

55..11..11

S
Seettttiinngg tthhee S
Sttoorraaggee M
Maannaaggeerr

The following work is required before setting the configuration of the disk array.

(1) Installing the Storage Manger
For information on installing the iSM, refer to the “Installation and Setting” in the “User’s Manual” or “User’s
Manual (UNIX)” in accordance with your OS.

(2) Considering the target Disk Array as a monitoring target
It is necessary to consider the disk array as the monitoring target by iSM in setting the configuration of the disk
array.

For information on how to target for monitoring, refer to 1.3 “Environmental Setting” in the “User’s

Manual” or “User’s Manual (UNIX)” in accordance with your OS.

(3) Setting the user information
For user information settings, refer to 1.3 “Environmental Setting” in the “User’s Manual” or “User’s Manual
(UNIX)” and 6.2 “Operating Range” in this manual.

To set configuration, your user level needs to be Level 3.

To see configuration, your user level needs to be Level 1 or higher.

55..11..22

S
Seettttiinngg aa D
Diisskk A
Arrrraayy

Depending on the operating environment, it is necessary to set the disk array.
refer to 6.1 “Parameters”.
understood.

55..11..33

For information on the parameters,

Before changing the settings, carefully read the disk array manual until they are fully

For how to set the disk array, refer to Chapter 9 “Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)”.

B
Biinnddiinngg aa P
Pooooll oorr R
RA
AN
NK
K

Bind the pool or RANK.

RAID configurations differ depending on the disk array.

- Disk arrays with pool
S400/S1400/S2400/S2800
- Disk arrays with RANK
Other than S400/S1400/S2400/S2800
For specific procedures, refer to 7.1 "Pool Binding" or 8.1 "Binding a RANK".

III-3

Chapter 5 Operation Procedures

55..11..44

B
Biinnddiinngg aa LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk

Bind a logical disk on a pool or RANK.
For specific procedure, refer to the following sections.
To bind a logical disk only (individual setting)
- Refer to 7.2.1 "Binding Logical Disks" for disk arrays with pool.
- Refer to 8.2.1 "Binding Logical Disks" for disk arrays with RANK
To bind a pool/RANK and logical disks (batch setting)
- Refer to 7.2.6 "Logical Disk Batch Setting" for disk arrays with pool.
- Refer to 8.2.4 "Logical Disk Batch Setting" for disk arrays with RANK.
Logical disks whose capacities are not the same cannot be paired.

Therefore, to use data replication, bind logical

disks having the same capacity in advance.

55..11..55

S
Seettttiinngg aa LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk N
Niicckknnaam
mee

You need to set the logical disk name to change the nickname allocated at logical disk binding.
For specific procedure, refer to the following sections.
- Refer to 9.1.4 "Renaming a Logical Disk" to set a nickname.
- Refer to 9.1.5 "Nickname Batch Setting" to set multiple nicknames

55..11..66

IInnssttaalllliinngg tthhee A
Acccceessss C
Coonnttrrooll

Install the Access Control.

For specific procedures, refer to 5.4 "Access Control Installation".

III-4

Chapter 5 Operation Procedures

55..22

P
Ph
hyyssiiccaall D
Diisskk E
Exxp
paan
nssiio
on
n

When expanding physical disks to the disk array in operation, make the settings basically in accordance with the
following procedure.
In operating the program, bind/expand a pool or RANK.
(For details, refer to 5.2.1 “Binding and Expanding a Pool

Bind/Expand a Pool or RANK

or RANK”.)

In operating the program, if necessary, bind a logical disk.

Bind a Logical Disk

(For details, refer to 5.2.2 “Binding a Logical Disk”.)

If necessary, change the Access Control configuration.
Change the Access Control

(For details, refer to 5.2.3 “Changing the Access Control

Configuration

55..22..11

Configuration”.)

B
Biinnddiinngg aanndd E
Exxppaannddiinngg aa P
Pooooll oorr R
RA
AN
NK
K

Build/expand a pool or RANK using the expanded physical disks.
For specific procedure, refer to the following sections.
For disk arrays with pool
- Refer to 7.1.1 "Binding a Pool" to build a new pool.
- Refer to 7.1.2 "Expanding Capacity of a Pool" to expand the existing pool.
For disk arrays with RANK
- Refer to 8.1.1 "RANK Bind" to build a new RANK.
- Refer to 8.1.3 "Expanding a RANK" to expand the existing RANK.

III-5

Chapter 5 Operation Procedures

55..22..22

B
Biinnddiinngg aa LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk

Bind/expand a logical disk on the pool or RANK that was newly added or expanded.
For specific procedure, refer to the following sections.
To bind a logical disk only (individual setting)
- Refer to 7.2.1 "Binding Logical Disks" for disk arrays with pool.
- Refer to 8.2.1 "Binding Logical Disks" for disk arrays with RANK.
To bind a pool/RANK and logical disks (batch setting)
- Refer to 7.2.6 "Logical Disk Batch Setting" for disk arrays with pool.
- Refer to 8.2.4 "Logical Disk Batch Setting" for disk arrays with RANK.
To expand a logical disk (individual setting)
- Refer to 7.2.2 "Expanding Capacity of Logical Disks" for disk arrays with pool.
Logical disks whose capacities are not the same cannot be paired.

Therefore, to use data replication, bind logical

disks having the same capacity in advance.

55..22..33

C
Chhaannggiinngg tthhee A
Acccceessss C
Coonnttrrooll
C
Coonnffiigguurraattiioonn

Change the Access Control configuration.

For specific procedures, refer to 5.6 "Access Control Configuration".

III-6

Chapter 5 Operation Procedures

55..33

L
Lo
og
giiccaall D
Diisskk C
Co
on
nffiig
gu
urraattiio
on
nC
Ch
haan
ng
giin
ng
g

When changing the logical disk configuration, make the settings basically in accordance with the following
procedure.

Deassign a Logical Disk

If necessary, unbind a logical disk.

Unbind a Logical Disk

(For details, refer to

5.3.2 "Unbinding a Logical Disk".)

If necessary, unbind a pool or RANK.
Unbind a Pool or RANK

(For details, refer

to 5.3.3 "Unbinding a Pool or RANK".)

If necessary, bind a pool or RANK.

Bind a Pool or RANK

(For details, refer to

5.3.4 "Binding a Pool or RANK".)

If necessary, bind a logical disk.
Bind a Logical Disk

(For details, refer to

5.3.5 "Binding a Logical Disk".

If necessary, change the Access Control configuration.
Change the Access Control

(For details, refer to 5.3.6 "Changing the Access Control

Configuration

Configuration".)

III-7

Chapter 5 Operation Procedures

55..33..11

D
Deeaassssiiggnniinngg aa LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk

Deassign a logical disk from the LD Set.

55..33..22

For specific procedures, refer to 10.3.3 "Deassigning a Logical Disk".

U
Unnbbiinnddiinngg aa LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk

Unbind a logical disk.

The data saved in logical disks thus unbound are lost; be careful about this.

Unbinding

procedures differ depending on the disk array.
- Disk arrays with pool
S400/S1400/S2400/S2800
- Disk arrays with RANK
Other than S400/S1400/S2400/S2800
For specific procedure, refer to the following sections.
- Refer to 7.2.3 "Unbinding Logical Disks" for disk arrays with pool.
- Refer to 8.2.2 "Unbinding Logical Disks" for disk arrays with RANK.

55..33..33

U
Unnbbiinnddiinngg aa P
Pooooll oorr R
RA
AN
NK
K

If necessary, unbind a pool or RANK.

Logical disks on the pool or RANK are unbound; be careful about this.

For specific procedure, refer to the following sections.
- Refer to 7.1.3 "Unbinding a Pool" for disk arrays with pool.
- Refer to 8.1.2 "RANK Unbind" for disk arrays with RANK

55..33..44

B
Biinnddiinngg aa P
Pooooll oorr R
RA
AN
NK
K

If you have unbound the pool or RANK, re-bind another pool or RANK.
For specific procedure, refer to the following sections.
- Refer to 7.1.1 "Binding a Pool" for disk arrays with pool.
- Refer to 8.1.1 "RANK Bind" for disk arrays with RANK.

III-8

Chapter 5 Operation Procedures

55..33..55

B
Biinnddiinngg aa LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk

Bind a logical disk on the pool or RANK.
For specific procedure, refer to the following sections.
To bind a logical disk only (individual setting)
- Refer to 7.2.1 "Binding Logical Disks" for disk arrays with pool.
- Refer to 8.2.1 "Binding Logical Disks" for disk arrays with RANK.
To bind a pool/RANK and logical disks (batch setting)
- Refer to 7.2.6 "Logical Disk Batch Setting" for disk arrays with pool.
- Refer to 8.2.4 "Logical Disk Batch Setting" for disk arrays with RANK.
Logical disks whose capacities are not the same cannot be paired.

Therefore, to use data replication, bind logical

disks having the same capacity in advance.

55..33..66 C
Chhaannggiinngg tthhee A
Acccceessss C
Coonnttrrooll C
Coonnffiigguurraattiioonn
Change the Access Control configuration.

For specific procedures, refer to 5.6 "Access Control Configuration

Changing".

III-9

Chapter 5 Operation Procedures

55..44

A
Acccceessss C
Co
on
nttrro
oll IIn
nssttaallllaattiio
on
n

When initially installing Access Control, make the settings basically in accordance with the following procedure.

Stop the Server

Set a Disk Array

Set a disk array.

(For details, refer to 5.4.2 "Setting a Disk Array".)

Set the port access mode.
Set the Port Access Mode

Create an LD Set

(For details, refer to 5.4.3 "Setting the Port

Access Mode".)

Create an LD Set.

(For details, refer to 5.4.4 "Creating an LD Set".)

Set links to the paths of LD Sets.
Link LD Set and Path

Assign a Logical Disk

an LD Set and Path".)

Assign a logical disk.

(For details, refer to 5.4.6 "Assigning a Logical

Disk".)

Start the Access Control.
Start the Access Control

(For details, refer to 5.4.5 "Linking

Access Control".

Start the Server

III-10

(For details, refer to 5.4.7 "Starting the

Chapter 5 Operation Procedures

55..44..11

S
Sttooppppiinngg tthhee S
Seerrvveerr

Stop the business server connected to the disk array.

55..44..22

S
Seettttiinngg aa D
Diisskk A
Arrrraayy

Depending on the operating environment, it is necessary to set the disk array.
refer to 6.1 "Parameters".
understood.

55..44..33

For information on the parameters,

Before changing the settings, carefully read the disk array manual until they are fully

For how to set the disk array, refer to Chapter 9 "Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)".

S
Seettttiinngg tthhee P
Poorrtt A
Acccceessss M
Mooddee

Set the port access mode.

Set the port mode to the WWN mode or Port mode depending on your operation.

For

specific procedures, refer to 10.1 "Changing the Port Mode".

55..44..44

C
Crreeaattiinngg aann LLD
DS
Seett

Create an LD Set.

Use the LD Set type supporting your business server OS.

business server name for the LD Set name.

55..44..55

For specific procedures, refer to 10.2.1 "Setting an LD Set".

LLiinnkkiinngg aann LLD
DS
Seett aanndd P
Paatthh

Link a path to the created LD Set.
WWN mode.

It is recommended to specify the

Link the WWPN for the HBA port in the business server to the LD Set in the

Link the disk array port connected to the business server to the LD Set in the Port mode.

For specific

procedures, refer to 10.2.2 "Linking an LD Set and Path".

55..44..66

A
Assssiiggnniinngg aa LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk

Assign a logical disk to the created LD Set.

Assign the logical disk accessed from the business server to the LD Set.

For specific procedures, refer to 10.3.1 "Assigning a New Logical Disk".

III-11

Chapter 5 Operation Procedures

55..44..77

S
Sttaarrttiinngg tthhee A
Acccceessss C
Coonnttrrooll

Start the Access Control.

Starting the Access Control activates its setting from the business server to the logical disk.

For specific procedures, refer to 10.4 "Starting the Access Control".

55..44..88

S
Sttaarrttiinngg tthhee S
Seerrvveerr

Start the business server connected to the disk array.

III-12

Chapter 5 Operation Procedures

55..55

S
Seerrvveerr E
Exxp
paan
nssiio
on
n

When expanding a server, make the settings basically in accordance with the following procedure.

Setting the Port Access Mode

Create an LD Set.

(For details, refer to 5.5.2

"Creating an LD Set".)

Create an LD Set

Set links to the paths of LD Sets.

Link an LD Set and Path

(For details, refer to

5.5.3 "Linking an LD Set and Path".)

Assign a logical disk.
Assign a Logical Disk

(For details, refer to 5.5.4

"Assigning a Logical Disk".)

Restart the Server

III-13

Chapter 5 Operation Procedures

55..55..11

S
Seettttiinngg tthhee P
Poorrtt A
Acccceessss M
Mooddee

Set the port access mode.

Set the port mode to the WWN mode or Port mode depending on your operation.

For

specific procedures, refer to 10.1 "Changing the Port Mode".

55..55..22

C
Crreeaattiinngg aann LLD
DS
Seett

Create an LD Set.

Use the LD Set type supporting your business server OS.

business server name for the LD Set name.

55..55..33

For specific procedures, refer to 10.2.1 "Setting an LD Set".

LLiinnkkiinngg aann LLD
DS
Seett aanndd P
Paatthh

Link a path to the created LD Set.
WWN mode.

It is recommended to specify the

Link the WWPN for the HBA port in the business server to the LD Set in the

Link the disk array port connected to the business server to the LD Set in the Port mode.

For specific

procedures, refer to 10.2.2 "Linking an LD Set and Path".

55..55..44

A
Assssiiggnniinngg aa LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk

Assign a logical disk to the created LD Set.

Assign the logical disk accessed from the business server to the LD Set.

For specific procedures, refer to 10.3.1 "Assigning a New Logical Disk".

55..55..55

R
Reessttaarrttiinngg tthhee S
Seerrvveerr

Restart the expanded business server.

III-14

Chapter 5 Operation Procedures

55..66

A
Acccceessss C
Co
on
nttrro
oll C
Co
on
nffiig
gu
urraattiio
on
n
C
ng
giin
ng
g
Ch
haan

When changing the Access Control configuration, make the settings basically in accordance with the following
procedure.

Stop the Server

Deassign a Logical Disk

If necessary, deassign a logical disk.

(For details, refer to 5.6.2

"Deassigning a Logical Disk".)

If necessary, delete an LD Set.
Delete an LD Set

Create an LD Set

(For details, refer to 5.6.3

"Deleting an LD Set".

If necessary, create an LD Set.

(For details, refer to 5.6.4

"Creating an LD Set".)

If necessary, set or change links to the paths of LD Sets. (For
Set/Change Link between LD
Set and Path

Assign a Logical Disk

details, refer to 5.6.5 "Setting/Changing Link between an LD Set
and Path".)

If necessary, assign a logical disk.
"Assigning a Logical Disk".)

Restart the Server

III-15

(For details, refer to 5.6.6

Chapter 5 Operation Procedures

55..66..11

S
Sttooppppiinngg tthhee S
Seerrvveerr

Stop the business server operation of which Access Control configuration will be changed.

55..66..22

D
Deeaassssiiggnniinngg aa LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk

Deassign a logical disk from the LD Set.

55..66..33

D
Deelleettiinngg aann LLD
DS
Seett

Delete unnecessary LD Sets.

55..66..44

For specific procedures, refer to 10.2.4 "Deleting an LD Set".

C
Crreeaattiinngg aann LLD
DS
Seett

Create an LD Set.

Use the LD Set type supporting your business server OS.

business server name for the LD Set name.

55..66..55

It is recommended to specify the

For specific procedures, refer to 10.2.1 "Setting an LD Set".

S
Seettttiinngg//C
Chhaannggiinngg LLiinnkk bbeettw
weeeenn aann LLD
DS
Seett
aanndd P
Paatthh

Link a path to the LD Set.
mode.

For specific procedures, refer to 10.3.3 "Deassigning a Logical Disk".

Link the WWPN for the HBA port in the business server to the LD Set in the WWN

Link the disk array port connected to the business server to the LD Set in the Port mode.

For specific

procedures, refer to 10.2.2 "Linking an LD Set and Path".

55..66..66

A
Assssiiggnniinngg aa LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk

Assign a logical disk to the LD Set.

Assign the logical disk accessed from the business server to the LD Set.

For

specific procedures, refer to 10.3.1 "Assigning a New Logical Disk" and 10.3.2 "Assigning an Additional Logical
Disk".

55..66..77

R
Reessttaarrttiinngg tthhee S
Seerrvveerr

Restart the business server of which Access Control configuration was changed.

III-16

Part IV Operations

Chapter 6 Parameters

Chapter 6 Parameters
This chapter describes parameters.

66..11 P
Paarraam
meetteerrss
The disk arrays respectively have their own specific disk array settings and referenceable parameters.

Table 6-1 lists

the parameters specifiable and referenceable on each disk array series.
Table 6-1

Setting/Display Parameter List (1/4)
Setting/Display
Parameter *1

Setting/Display Screen
LD Batch Binding
Nickname Batch Setting
Replication Batch
Setting
RANK/spare Setting

Pool Setting

Pool Setting (Snapshot)

Disk Array Series
Name
1400/
400
2800
2400

LD Batch Binding
Nickname Batch Setting
Replication Batch Setting

√

√

√

√
−

√
√

√
√

RANK Bind
RANK Unbind

−
−

−
−

−
−

RANK Information Display
Capacity Expansion

−
−

−
−

−
−

Change Rebuild Time
Rebuild Start Instruction *2

−
−

−
−

−
−

Spare Bind
Spare Unbind
Physical Disk Information Display

√
√
√

√
√
√

√
√
√

Pool Bind
Pool Unbind

√
√

√
√

√
√

Pool Capacity Expansion
Change Pool Rebuild Time

√
√

√
√

√
√

Change Pool Expansion Time
Change Pool Name

√
√

√
√

√
√

Pool Information Display

√

√

√

Snapshot Reserve Area (SRA) Bind

√

√

√

Snapshot Reserve Area (SRA)
Unbind

√

√

√

Snapshot Reserve Area (SRA)
Expansion

√

√

√

IV-2

Chapter 6 Parameters

Table 6-1
Setting/Display Screen

Setting/Display Parameter List (2/4)
Setting/Display Parameter *1

Disk Array Series
Name
400

LD Setting

LD Bind

√

√

√

LD Unbind
LD Information Display

√
√

√
√

√
√

Change Ownership
Change Format Time

−
√

−
√

−
√

Change LD Name

√

√

√

Logical Disk Capacity Expansion

√

√

√

Generation Adding

√

√

√

Generation Unbind

√

√

√

LV Binding

√

√

√

Setting/Displaying Disk Array Name

√

√

√

Setting/Displaying Port Name

√

√

√

Setting/Display Port Platform
Setting/Display Disk Array Network

√

√

√

Network Setting

√

√

√

License

Unlocking License

√

√

√

Special Setting

Setting/Displaying Cross Call

−

−

−

Setting/Displaying Auto Assignment

−

−

−

Setting/Displaying Spare Mode

−

−

−

Setting/Displaying Expand LUN

−

−

−

Setting/Displaying Disk Array Time

√

√

√

LD Setting
(Snapshot)

Nickname Setting
Platform Setting

Get Log *3

√

√

√

Access Control Setting

Setting/Displaying Access Control

√

√

√

LD Administrator Setting

Setting/Displaying Access Control

−

−

√

Initialization of Logical Disk

−

−

√

Initialization of EVN (Extended
Volume Name)

−

−

√

Setting/Displaying of Performance
Optimization

−

−

−

Setting Cache Segment

Get Configuration
Information
√:

1400/
2800
2400

Specifiable −:

Setting Cache Segment

−

−

√

Assigning Logical Disk
/Freeing Logical Disk

−

−

√

Displaying Segment State

−

−

√

Get Configuration Information *3

√

√

√

Not specifiable

IV-3

Chapter 6 Parameters

Table 6-1
Setting/Display
Screen
LD Batch Binding
Nickname Batch
Setting
Replication Batch
Setting
RANK/spare
Setting

Pool Setting

Pool Setting
(Snapshot)

LD Setting

LD Setting
(Snapshot)

Setting/Display
Parameter *1

Setting/Display Parameter List (3/4)
Disk Array Series Name
100/
1100 1200
2100 2200 2300
1300

3100/ 3300/
4100 4300

LD Batch Binding
Nickname Batch Setting

√

√

√

√

√

√

−

−

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Replication Batch Setting

−

−

−

√

√

√

√

√

RANK Bind
RANK Unbind
RANK Information
Display
Capacity Expansion

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

−
−

−
−

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

−

−

Change Rebuild Time
Rebuild Start Instruction
*2

√

√

√

√

√

√

−

−

√

√

√

√

√

√

−

−

Spare Bind
Spare Unbind
Physical Disk Information
Display
Pool Bind

√

√

√

√

√

√

−

−

√

√

√

√

√

√

−

−

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

Pool Unbind
Pool Capacity Expansion
Change Pool Rebuild
Time
Change Pool Expansion
Time

−
−

−
−

−
−

−
−

−
−

−
−

−
−

−
−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

Change Pool Name

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

Pool Information Display

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

Snapshot Reserve Area
(SRA) Bind

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

Snapshot Reserve Area
(SRA) Unbind

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

Snapshot Reserve Area
(SRA) Expansion

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

LD Bind
LD Unbind

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

−
−

−
−

LD Information Display
Change Ownership

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
√

√
−

√
−

Change Format Time

√

√

√

√

√

√

−

−

Change LD Name

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

Logical Disk Capacity
Expansion

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

Generation Adding

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

Generation Unbind

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

LV Binding

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

IV-4

Chapter 6 Parameters

Table 6-1

Setting/Display
Screen
Nickname Setting

Platform Setting
Network Setting

Setting/Display Parameter List (4/4)
Disk Array Series Name
Setting/Display Parameter
100/
3100/ 3300/
*1
1100 1200
2100 2200 2300
1300
4100 4300
Setting/Displaying Disk
Array Name
Setting/Displaying Port
Name
Setting/Display Port
Platform
Setting/Display Disk
Array Network

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

−

√

√

−

√

√

−

−

−

√

√

−

√

√

−

−

License

Unlocking License

−

−

√

−

−

√

−

√

Special Setting

Setting/Displaying Cross
Call

√

√

√

√

√

√

−

−

Setting/Displaying Auto
Assignment

√

√

√

√

√

√

−

−

Setting/Displaying Spare
Mode

√

√

√

√

√

√

−

−

Setting/Displaying Expand
LUN

√

√

√

√

√

√

−

−

Setting/Displaying Disk
Array Time

√

√

√

√

√

√

−

−

Get Log *3

√

√

√

√

√

√

−

−

Access Control
Setting

Setting/Displaying Access
Control

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

LD Administrator
Setting

Setting/Displaying Access
Control

−

−

−

−

−

−

√

√

Initialization of Logical
Disk

−

−

−

−

−

−

√

√

Initialization of EVN
(Extended Volume Name)

−

−

−

−

−

−

√

√

Setting/Displaying of
Performance Optimization

−

−

−

−

−

−

√

√

Setting Cache Segment

−

−

−

−

−

−

√

√

Assigning Logical Disk
/Freeing Logical Disk

−

−

−

−

−

−

√

√

Displaying Segment State

−

−

−

−

−

−

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

Setting Cache
Segment

Get Configuration Get Configuration
Information
Information *3
√:

Specifiable −:

Not specifiable

Notes:
*1:

To set the parameters, your user level needs to be L3 (level 3). However, it is allowed for any user whose user
level is L1 (level 1) or L2 (level 2) to display the parameters in reference mode.

For information about the

operation levels, refer to 6.2 “Operating Range”.
*2:

While the Rebuild Start Instruction parameter can also be operated in reference mode, your user level needs to be
L3 (level 3).

*3:

The Get Log and Get Configuration Information parameters can also be operated in reference mode.

IV-5

Chapter 6 Parameters

66..22 O
Op
peerraattiin
ng
gR
Raan
ng
gee
Set level 1 to 3 as a user level. The following shows target users and executable functions at each level:
• Level 1 (L1):
This level is defined for general users.

The users are permitted to perform only reference operation focusing on

status display or monitoring.
• Level 2 (L2):
This level is defined for operators.

The operators are permitted to perform the level 1 operations and execute

functions necessary for daily operations.
• Level 3 (L3):
This level is defined for system administrators. The system administrators are permitted to execute all functions
including various settings for disk arrays.
After connection to the iSM server, the user level is displayed on the status bar of the iSM client. Each user can use
the functions allowed for the indicated level only.

IV-6

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting
(S400/S1400/S2400/S2800)
This chapter describes how to set the configuration of the disk array in S400/S1400/S2400/S2800. For configuration setting in
S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300, refer to Chapter 8.

77..11 P
Po
oo
oll B
Biin
nd
diin
ng
g
Specify the physical disks of the disk array to be put in the RAID configuration and assign the RAID type to bind a
pool.

Then, bind the logical disks to the pool to bind the logical disks. In addition, bind a control volume

individually. A control volume is a volume for control over snapshot operation. (For the details of control volumes,
refer to "Snapshot User’s Manual (Function Guide)" (IS030).)
After adding physical disks, take the steps stated above to the added physical disks to bind the logical disks.

Adding

physical disks puts no influence on any existing logical disks, which belongs to the pool and already in use.

Adding

and binding logical disks to the pool also puts no influence on any existing logical disks.
Pools are classified into two types; the dynamic pool allows expanding the capacity of the pool and the logical disks,
and the basic pool does not allow expanding the capacity of the pool and the logical disks.
The logical disk configurations selectable by the pool are as follows:
Logical disk configuration: Dynamic pool RAID6 (4+PQ)/(8+PQ)
Basic pool RAID1 (1+1)
Basic pool RAID5 (4+P)
Basic pool RAID10 (1+1) × 2/(1+1) × 4/(1+1) x 8
Basic pool RAID50 (4+P) × 2/(4+P) × 4
Bind logical disks in accordance with the following procedure.
(1)

Pool Bind

(2)

LD Bind

IV-7

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..11..11 B
Biinnddiinngg aa P
Pooooll
Bind a pool through wizard.

Bind a new pool following the steps indicated on the wizard.

(1) Starting up the pool binding wizard
Click the [Pool Binding] button in the “LD Individual Bind/Unbind” screen.

Figure 7-1

Starting Up Pool Binding Wizard

IV-8

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(2) Setting about the pool binding wizard
Clicking the [Pool Binding] button on the “LD Individual Bind/Unbind” screen displays the “Welcome to the
Pool Binding Wizard” screen.

Figure 7-2 Setting About Pool Binding Wizard
[Next] button:

Displays the “Pool Selection” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes
if agreed.

IV-9

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(3) Selecting the pool type
Clicking the [Next] button on the “Welcome to the Pool Binding Wizard” screen displays the “Pool Selection”
screen.

Figure 7-3 Selecting Pool Type
You can bind a pool of either of the following types with a fixed RAID configuration:
Dynamic:

RAID6 (8+PQ) or RAID6(4+PQ) is allowed.
The dynamic pool and its logical disks are easy to expand.

Basic:

RAID1, RAID10, RAID5, or RAID50 is allowed.
It is not allowed to expand any basic pool and its logical disks.

[Next] button:

Displays the “RAID Type Selection” screen.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Welcome to the Pool Binding Wizard” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes
if agreed.

IV-10

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(4) Selecting the RAID type
Clicking the [Next] button on the “Pool Selection” screen displays the “RAID Type Selection” screen.

Figure 7-4

Selecting RAID Type (for Dynamic Pool)

IV-11

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

Figure 7-5
RAID type radio button:

Selecting RAID Type (for Basic Pool)

Put a checkmark on the RAID type of the pool you want to bind. The selections
depend on the type you specified on the “Pool Selection” screen.

[Next] button:

Displays the “PD Selection” screen.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Pool Selection” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes
if agreed.

IV-12

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(5) Selecting physical disks
Clicking the [Next] button on the “RAID Type Selection” screen displays the “PD Selection” screen.

Figure 7-6 Selecting Physical Disks
Unused PDs:

Lists physical disks still unused.

Pool PDs:

Lists the physical disks to use for the pool.

[Add] button:

Select unused physical disks to use for the pool, then click this button to add them to the pool.

[Delete] button:

Select any physical disks to be removed from the pool, then click this button.

The selected

physical disks are restored as unused.
[Next] button:

Displays the “Detail Parameter Setting for Pool Binding” screen.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “RAID Type Selection” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes if
agreed.

IV-13

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

If no RAID type is available for the pool with the physical disks you selected, any of the [25201], [25202], or
[25227] message box is displayed as follows:.

Figure 7-7

IV-14

Message Box

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(6) Setting detailed parameters
Clicking the [Next] button on the “PD Selection” screen displays the “Detail Parameter Setting for Pool Binding”
screen.

Figure 7-8 Setting Detailed Parameters
Pool Name:

Specify the name of the pool. This screen initially puts the name automatically assigned in
the form of “Pool” + Number (hexadecimal, 4 digits) in the field. Note that you cannot
specify any name already used in the disk array.

Any pool name that does not conform to the following rules is invalid:
y Number of available characters:

1 to 24 characters

y Available characters:

Alphabet:

A to Z (a to z)
* Upper- and lower-case characters are distinguished.

Numerals:

0 to 9

Underbar:

_

Slash:

/

* All the characters must be 1-byte characters.

IV-15

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

For an invalid pool name, any of the [25203], [25204], or [25205] message box is displayed as follows:

Figure 7-9
Rebuild Time:

Message Box

Specify the duration of time to do rebuild if a physical disk becomes faulty. You can specify
0 to 24 hours. Although specifying 0 rebuilds the faulty disk in the shortest time, select an
appropriate time taking account of the load to the host I/O.

The time specified in the field is

just a target, thus it is not assured to take the specified time.
[Next] button:

Displays the “Confirmation for Pool Binding Parameter” screen.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “PD Selection” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes if
agreed.

IV-16

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(7) Checking for the parameters specified for the pool
Clicking the [Next] button on the “Detail Parameter Setting for Pool Binding” screen displays the “Confirmation
for Pool Binding Parameter” screen.

Figure 7-10

Checking for Parameters Specified for Pool

Pool Type:

Type of the pool

RAID Type:

RAID type of the pool

Pool Number:

Number of the pool to bind

Pool Name:

Name of the pool to bind

Pool Capacity:

Capacity of the pool to bind

Rebuild Time:

Duration of time to rebuild the pool

Pool PDs:

List of physical disks that bind the pool

IV-17

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

Number of PDs:

Number of physical disks that bind the pool

[Next] button:

Displays a message asking you to proceed.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Detail Parameter Setting for Pool Binding” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes if
agreed.

Figure 7-11

Message Box to Start Binding Pool

IV-18

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

Insufficient license capacity
Binding or expanding pools may result in insufficiency of license capacity due to the increased capacity.
status restricts operation of the following functions as described below:
•

DDR/RDR
Pairs cannot be newly set or unpaired.
Replication operation for set pairs is possible.

•

RDR DisasterRecovery
ATgroup creation, deletion, ATgroup rename, and ATgroup volume creation/deletion are disabled.
ATgroup that is already set can be manipulated.

•

Snapshot configuration
Generations cannot be added or deleted.
Only thresholds can be changed.

•

Snapshot
No restriction is placed.

•

Cache partitioning
New cache segments cannot be bound.
LDs can be allocated or unbounded for cache segments that are already defined.

Figure 7-12

License Capacity Insufficiency Inquiry Message

IV-19

This

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(8) Finishing binding the pool
When the pool is successfully bound, the following screen is displayed:

Figure 7-13 Pool Successfully Bound
[Finish] button:

Closes the wizard.

IV-20

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..11..22 E
Exxppaannddiinngg C
Caappaacciittyy ooff aa P
Pooooll
You can expand the capacity of a pool from the “LD Individual Bind/Unbind” screen.

Figure 7-14

Expanding the Pool Capacity


1.

Select Dynamic Pool to be expanded in the configuration tree view.

2.

Select a dynamic pool to be expanded from the list of pools in the detailed information view.

3.

Click the [Capacity Expansion] button.

4.

A dialog box for expanding the capacity of a pool appears.

Before expanding the capacity of a pool, be sure to check that the physical disks of the pool have no problem.

IV-21

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

Figure 7-15

Pool Capacity Expansion Dialog

Pool Information
Number:

Number of the pool

Name:

Name of the pool

Capacity:

Current capacity of the pool

RAID Type:

Current RAID type

Expansion Method
Without Pool Rebuilding:

Allows expanding the capacity of the pool without any influence to the existing
logical disks.

For a pool in a configuration of RAID6 (4+PQ), 6 or more

physical disks are needed. For a pool in a configuration of RAID6 (8+PQ), 10
or more physical disks are needed.

IV-22

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

With Pool rebuilding:

Allows expanding the capacity of the pool without any restriction on the
number of the logical disks, in a relatively longer time.

Specify Expansion Time:

Allows specifying the duration of time to expand the all physical disks only
when you specified “With Pool Rebuilding”. Although specifying 0 expands
the capacity in the shortest time, select an appropriate time taking account of
the load to the host I/O. The time specified in the field is just a target, thus it is
not assured to take the specified time.

Selection PD for Expansion
Unused PDs:

Lists disks still unused.

Pool PDs:

List of disks that will compose the pool after expansion

Number of Adding PDs:

Number of physical disks to be added to the pool

[Add] button:

Select unused physical disks to use for the pool in the “Unused PD” list, then click this
button to add them to the pool.

[Delete] button:

Select any physical disks to be removed from the pool in the “to Pool” list, then click this
button. The selected physical disks are restored to the list of unused physical disks.
*

It is not allowed to select any physical disks already put in the other pools.

Clicking the [OK] button displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to expand the capacity of the pool.
If the physical disks selected are insufficient for the expansion, either of the [25218] or [25227] message box is
displayed as follows:

Figure 7-16

Message Box

IV-23

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

Figure 7-17

Message for Asking Expansion of Pool Capacity

Information about the pool:
Number:

Number of the pool

Name:

Name of the pool

Before Expanding Capacity:

Capacity of the pool before expansion

After Expanding Capacity:

Capacity of the pool after expansion

Rebinding:

Way of expanding the capacity of the pool

Expansion Time:

Duration of time to expand the physical disks

IV-24

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

Information about the physical disks:
Number of PDs Before Expansion:

Number of physical disks that compose the pool before expansion

Selected PDs for Pool Binding:

Number of physical disks to be added to expand the pool

Number of PDs After Expansion:

Number of physical disks that are composing the pool after expansion

Pool PDs:

List of physical disks that will compose the pool after expansion

[Yes] button:

Starts expanding the capacity of the pool

[No] button:

Returns to the “Pool Capacity Expansion” dialog box.

Insufficient license capacity
Expanding a pool may result in insufficiency of license capacity. For insufficiency of license capacity, refer to
Page IV-19.

5.

When the pool is successfully expanded, the following message is displayed.

Figure 7-18

Message for Successful Completion of Expanding Pool

IV-25

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..11..33 U
Unnbbiinnddiinngg aa P
Pooooll
You can unbind a pool from the “LD Individual Bind/Unbind” screen.

Figure 7-19

Unbinding a Pool


1.

Select Basic Pool or Dynamic Pool in the configuration tree view.

2.

Select a pool to be unbound from the list of pools in the detailed information view.

3.

Click the [Pool Unbind] button.

IV-26

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

4.

A message box asking you to unbind the pool is displayed.

Figure 7-20

Message Box for Unbinding a Pool

When the pool to be unbound has logical disks already bound, the following dialog box is displayed to ask you to
unbind the logical disks together, unbinding the pool.

Figure 7-21

Message for Unbinding a Pool and Logical Disks

IV-27

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

You cannot unbind the pool if any of the logical disks in it are:
1. In Access Control (Port mode).
2. In Access Control (WWN mode).
3. Paired.
4. SRA bound (snapshot).
5. Link setting is performed (snapshot).
6. Assigned to a cache segment (setting cache segment).
7. A reserve group is set (LD Administrator).
To unbind the pool, be sure to release the logical disks in the states mentioned above, if any.

5.

When the pool is successfully unbound, the following message is displayed.

When the logical disks are

unbound together, a message is displayed for successful completion of unbinding the logical disks first, then a
message is displayed for successful completion of unbinding the pool.

Figure 7-22

Message for Successful Completion of Unbinding Logical Disks

Figure 7-23

Message for Successful Completion of Unbinding Pool

IV-28

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..11..44 R
Reennaam
miinngg aa P
Pooooll
You can rename a pool from the “LD Individual Bind/Unbind” screen.

Figure 7-24

Renaming a Pool


1.

Select Basic Pool or Dynamic Pool in the configuration tree view.

2.

Select a pool to be renamed from the list of pools in the detailed information view.

3.

Click the [Change Name] button.

IV-29

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

4.

A dialog box for renaming a pool appears.

Figure 7-25

Dialog Box for Renaming a Pool

New Name: Specify the new name to be assigned to the pool.
For details on how to rename a pool, refer to “Pool Name” in 7.1.1 (6) “Setting detailed
parameters”.
5.

When the pool is successfully renamed, the following message box is displayed.

Figure 7-26

Message for Successful Completion of Renaming a Pool

IV-30

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..11..55 C
Chhaannggiinngg R
Reebbuuiilldd TTiim
mee aanndd E
Exxppaannssiioonn
TTiim
mee ooff aa P
Pooooll
You can change the rebuild time and expansion time of a pool from the “LD Individual Bind/Unbind” screen.

Figure 7-27

Changing the Rebuild Time and Expansion Time of a Pool


1.

Select Basic Pool or Dynamic Pool in the configuration tree view.

2.

Select a pool whose time setting is to be changed from the list of pools in the detailed information view.

3.

Click the [Change Time] button.

IV-31

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

4.

A dialog box for changing the rebuild/expansion time of a pool appears.

Figure 7-28

Change Pool Rebuild/Expansion Time Dialog

Pool Information:
Number:

Number of the pool

Name:

Name of the pool

Rebuild Time:

Current duration of time specified to rebuild the pool

Expansion Time:

Current duration of time specified to expand the pool (selectable only when expanding
the pool)

Rebuild Time:

Specify the duration of time to rebuild the pool.
Specify the duration of time to do rebuild if a physical disk becomes faulty in the disk
array.

You can specify 0 to 24 hours.

Although specifying 0 rebuilds the faulty disk in

the shortest time, select an appropriate time taking account of the load to the host I/O.
The time specified in the field is just a target, thus it is not assured to take the specified
time.

IV-32

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

Expansion Time:

Specify the duration of time to expand the (Only Dynamic Pool) pool.
You can specify the duration of time to expand the physical disks added to the pool.
Although specifying 0 expands the pool in the shortest time, select an appropriate time
taking account of the load to the host I/O.

The time specified in the field is just a target,

thus it is not assured to take the specified time.
5.

Put a checkmark on the item you want to change, then specify the time.

6.

When the time is successfully changed, the following message is displayed:

Figure 7-29

Message for Successful Completion of Changing Time

IV-33

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..22 M
Meetth
ho
od
do
off B
Biin
nd
diin
ng
gL
Lo
og
giiccaall D
Diisskkss
Bind logical disks of the disk array in accordance with the following procedure in terms of each PD group.
(1)

Spare Bind
It is necessary to set Spares in accordance with their applications. For information on Spares, refer to 2.3 “Spare”.

(2)

Pool/RANK Bind
After considering the RAID characteristics, bind the RAID type pools suitable to the application.
Refer to Appendix C “RAID” for the types of RAID.
In pool or RANK binding, pay attention to the fact that the maximum capacity of the logical disk is less than the
pool or RANK capacity.

(3)

LD Bind
Bind the logical disk with the most suitable capacity in accordance with its application.

It is impossible to set a

pair unless the logical disk capacity is the same; therefore, when using data replications, it is necessary to bind
logical disks of the same capacity beforehand.

IV-34

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..22..11 B
Biinnddiinngg LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskkss
Bind logical disks through wizard.

Bind logical disks to a specified pool following the steps indicated on the wizard.

To bind a control volume, follow this procedure.

(1) Starting up the LD binding wizard
Click the [LD Binding] button in the “LD Individual Bind/Unbind” screen.

Figure 7-30

Starting Up Wizard for Binding Logical Disks

IV-35

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(2) Setting about the LD binding wizard
Clicking the [LD Binding] button on the “LD Individual Bind/Unbind” screen displays the “Welcome to the LD
Binding Wizard” screen.

Figure 7-31

Setting about Wizard for Binding Logical Disks

[Next] button:

Displays the “Pool Selection” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes
if agreed.

IV-36

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(3) Selecting a pool
Clicking the [Next] button on the “Welcome to the LD Binding Wizard” screen displays the “Pool Selection”
screen.

Figure 7-32
Pool List:

Selecting Pool Type

Allows selecting a pool you want to bind logical disks in it.
An asterisk (*) in the “Free Capacity[GB]” field indicates that the pool has multiple
unused areas.

(An asterisk is displayed for a basic pool whose areas are fragmented due

to logical disks removed.)
[Next] button:

Displays the “Free Area Selection” screen when you select a pool with multiple unused
areas. When you select a pool without multiple unused areas or dynamic pool, the
“Binding Method” screen is displayed.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Welcome to the LD Binding Wizard” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes
if agreed.

IV-37

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(4) Selecting unused areas
Selecting a pool with multiple unused areas and clicking the [Next] button on the “Pool Selection” screen displays
the “Free Area Selection” screen.

Figure 7-33

Selecting Unused Areas

Free Area List:

Allows selecting areas in which to bind logical disks.

[Next] button:

Displays the “Binding Method” screen.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Pool Selection” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes
if agreed.

IV-38

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(5) Specifying the way of binding the logical disks
Clicking the [Next] button on the “Free Area Selection” screen displays the “Binding Method” screen.
This screen is displayed when you select a pool without multiple unused areas or dynamic pool and click the
[Next] button on the “Pool Selection” screen.

Figure 7-34

Specifying the Way of Binding the Logical Disks

Specify one of the following ways of binding the logical disks:
y

Only specify the number of LDs (default)
Specify the number of logical disks to bind in the pool.

y

Only specify LD capacity
Specify the capacity of each of the logical disks to bind in the pool. You can specify a recommended
capacity, set the capacity same with that of a logical disk already bound, or directly designate any value for
the capacity.

y

Specify both the number of LDs and LD capacity
Specify any desired values for the number of logical disks and the capacity of one logical disk.
To bind a control volume, check this option.

IV-39

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

[Next] button:

One of the following screens is displayed according to the specified way of binding the logical
disks:
y

Check-marking on [Only specify the number of LDs]:
Displays the “Specify Number of LDs” screen.

y

Check-marking on [Only specify LD capacity]:
Displays the “Specify the Capacity” screen.

y

Check-marking on [Specify both the number of LDs and LD capacity]:
Displays the “Specify Number of LDs and LD Capacity” screen.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Free Area Selection” screen. When you select a pool without multiple
unused areas or dynamic pool, the “Pool Selection” screen is displayed again.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes if
agreed.

Although the capacity specified in the field is that of the region you can use, there are some region for controlling
the disks of the pools in addition to the region usable by the user.

IV-40

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(6)-1 Specifying the number of logical disks
Check-marking on [Only specify the number of LDs] on the “Binding Method” screen and clicking the [Next]
button displays the “Specify Number of LDs” screen.

Figure 7-35
Number of LDs:

Specifying the Number of Logical Disks

Specify the number of logical disks to bind.
Each logical disk is bound in the unit of 1 GB, and the maximum available capacity is
automatically calculated.

[Next] button:

Displays the “Setting Detail Parameter for LD Binding” screen.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Binding Method” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes if
agreed.

IV-41

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(6)-2 Specifying the logical disk capacity
Check-marking on [Only specify LD capacity] on the “Binding Method” screen and clicking the [Next] button
displays the “Specify the Capacity” screen.

Figure 7-36

Specifying the Logical Disk Capacity

Use one of the following ways of specifying the capacity of the logical disks to bind:
y Specify recommend LD capacity
Specify one of the recommended values for the capacity of the logical disks to bind from the pull-down menu.
y Specify existing LD
Select a logical disk already bound to apply the capacity of the logical disk.

You can select a logical disk in

the “LD Specification” screen by clicking the [Reference] button.
y Specify LD capacity
Specify the capacity in units of 1 GB directly.

The number of logical disks allowed to bind is automatically

calculated according to the value of the capacity you specified.

IV-42

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

Note that specifying a recommended capacity makes the capacity occupied by the pool larger than the capacity of
the logical disks by 0.2 GB approximately and maximum.
For details, refer to Appendix D “Notes on Use for Data Replication”.

[Next] button:

Displays the “Setting Detail Parameter for LD Binding” screen.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Binding Method” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes if
agreed.

IV-43

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(6)-3 Specifying the number of logical disks and the logical disk capacity
Check-marking on [Specify both the number of LDs and LD capacity] on the “Binding Method” screen and
clicking the [Next] button displays the “Specify Number of LDs and LD Capacity” screen.

Figure 7-37

Specifying the Number of Logical Disks and Logical Disk Capacity

Number of LDs:

Specify the number of logical disks according to (6)-1.

Set LD capacity:

Specify the capacity of the logical disks according to (6)-2.

[Next] button:

Displays the “Setting Detail Parameter for LD Binding” screen.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Binding Method” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes if
agreed.

IV-44

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

About control volumes
(1)

A control volume is a volume for control over a disk array. To use SnapControl, it is required on the server
where the LV is used.

(2)

Specify the capacity of a control volume following the steps described below:
1.

Specify the recommended capacity, and display the pull down menu.

2.

From the pull down menu, select the capacity of 0.2 GB (0.2 GB appears on the top of the pull down
menu).

Figure 7-38

Screen for Specifying Logical Disks and Their Capacity

By selecting a logical disk from the list, you can bind the logical disks setting their capacities same with it.

For

an unselectable logical disk, either of the following reasons is indicated in the Not Specify Reason column:
y

Excess of capacity:

The capacity of the logical disk is exceeding the unused space of the pool.

y

Capacity unit disagreement:

It is not possible to bind logical disks setting the same capacity with that
of this logical disk.

For detailed reasons for mismatching capacity units and details on binding logical disks with a RAID
configuration different from those in use, refer to Appendix D “Notes on Use for Data Replication”.
[OK] button:

Applies the parameter you specified on this screen, and displays back the screen on which
you specified the capacity of the logical disks or the number of logical disks and their
capacity.

IV-45

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

[Cancel] button:

Displays back the screen on which you specified the capacity of the logical disks or the
number of logical disks and their capacity.

All parameter changes you made on this

screen are canceled.

It is allowed to change the logical disk number selection displayed through this wizard or number displayed on the
LD specification screen to the name of the logical disk.

For details, refer to “Client Start/Stop” in the “User’s

Manual” or “User’s Manual (UNIX)” in accordance with the OS in use.

Note that selecting detailed view in the

LD specification screen switches the positions of the numbers and the logical disk names.

IV-46

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(7) Setting the detailed parameters for binding the logical disks
The “Setting Detail Parameter for LD Binding” screen allows checking for and changing the format, name, and
initial number of the logical disks, and the time to bind them.

Figure 7-39
[Change] button:

Specifying Detailed Settings of the Logical Disks

Allows you to make changes for the items displayed in the “Setting Detail Parameter for
LD Binding” screen.

If you need to make changes, click this button to make changes on

the “Change” dialog box.

Otherwise, click the [Next] button to proceed.

[Next] button:

Displays the “Confirmation for LD Binding” screen.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Specify Number of LDs”, “Specify the Capacity”, or “Specify Number
of LDs and LD Capacity” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes
if agreed.

IV-47

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

Clicking the [Change] button on the “Setting Detail Parameter for LD Binding” screen displays the [Change]
dialog:

Figure 7-40
OS Type/LD Name:

Change Dialog Box

You can specify the format and name of the logical disks to bind.
must be unique in the system.

The logical disk name

(Do not assign the same name twice or more.)

Therefore,

when you bind multiple sets of logical disks simultaneously, the logical disks are named
with the character string specified and automatically numbered in order.
The initial value of the logical disk name field consists of 20 characters; 16 characters
specific to the disk array and 4 characters of the logical disk number.

When you do not

make any change for logical disk name, the initial value is used in the form mentioned
above:
Example: 200000004C518CAC0000, 200000004C518CAC0001, ...
Not changing the logical disk format displays a blank in the OS Type field.
Note that inputting a blank to the format sets the initial values for shipment; a blank in the
OS Type field and 16 characters specific to the disk array + 4 characters of the logical disk
number in the Name field.
Table 7-1 lists the selectable logical disk formats.

IV-48

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

You can change the logical disk format and name later from the main window on the iSM
client or according to 7.2.4 “Renaming a Logical Disk”.
Table 7-1 List of Formats
Description

Format

(1)

A4

Logical disk operated on the ACOS-4 system
format, ask our maintenance engineer.)

A2

Logical disk operated on the ACOS-2 system

AX

Logical disk operated on the AIX system

CX

Logical disk operated on the Solaris system

NX

Logical disk operated on the HP-UX system

LX

Logical disk operated on the Linux system

WN

Logical disk operated on the Windows system

(If you are setting this

Any logical disk name that does not conform to the following rules is invalid:
y Number of available characters:

1 to 24 characters

y Available characters:

Alphabet

A to Z (a to z)
* Upper- and lower-case characters are distinguished.

Numerals:

0 to 9

Underbar:

_

Slash:

/

* All the characters must be 1-byte characters.
(2)

An invalid specification applies the logical disk name to be assigned by default.

(3)

On the ACOS-4 system, use the logical disk id names same with those on the host.

For details about the format A4, refer to Appendix G “ACOS-4 Resource Operation Guard”.

IV-49

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

Starting LD Number: A number which is equal to or higher than the specified logical disk number and still
unused is assigned.
When this parameter is omitted (or if the specified number is invalid), the number
subsequent to the largest logical disk number already occupied is assigned.
For example, when logical disk numbers 0, 1, 3, and 4 are in use, new logical disks are
numbered as follows:
When omitted:

5, 6, 7 …

When 0 specified:

2, 5, 6 …

When 10 specified:

10, 11, 12 …

Remark:

Unlike in the case of the screen of
S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300, the screen allows
changes for previous values.

Format Time:

Specify the maximum duration of time to bind the logical disks (only for those to be
bound in a basic pool).
You can specify 0 to 24 hours. Specifying 0 binds the logical disks in the shortest time.
The time specified in the field is just a target, thus it is not assured to take the specified
time.

The specified time is the standard average, thus the time actually required depends on the load on the disk array.

Specify 0 to bind the logical disks in the shortest time. Otherwise, specify a larger value (24 or close to it) to
reduce load to the disk array and give priority to the I/O of other transactions.

[OK] button:

Displays back the screen for specifying the details of the logical disks with the parameter(s)
you changed.

[Cancel] button:

Displays back the screen for specifying the details of the logical disks.
changes you made on this screen are canceled.

IV-50

All parameter

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(8) Checking for the parameters specified for the logical disks to bind
Clicking the [Next] button on the “Setting Detail Parameter for LD Binding” screen displays the “Confirmation
for LD Binding” screen.

Figure 7-41

Checking the Parameters Specified for the Logical Disks

[Next] button:

Displays a message asking you to proceed.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Setting Detail Parameter for LD Binding” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes if
agreed.

Figure 7-42

Message Box to Start Binding Logical Disks

IV-51

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(9) Finishing binding the logical disks
When the logical disks are successfully bound, the following screen is displayed:

Figure 7-43
[Finish] button:

Successful Completion of Binding Logical Disks

Closes the wizard.

IV-52

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..22..22 E
Exxppaannddiinngg C
Caappaacciittyy ooff LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskkss
You can expand the logical disk capacity from the “LD Individual Bind/Unbind” screen.
You can expand the capacity of logical disks which belong to a dynamic pool.

Figure 7-44

Expanding the Capacity of Logical Disks


1.

Select a dynamic pool in the configuration tree view.

2.

Click the [Logical Disk] tab on the detailed information view.

3.

Select a logical disk you want to remove from the list of logical disks in the detailed information view.

4.

Click the [Capacity Expansion] button.

IV-53

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

5.

The “LD Capacity Expansion” dialog appears.

Figure 7-45

LD Capacity Expansion Dialog

For details on how to expand the logical disk capacity, refer to 7.2.1 (6)-2 “Specifying the logical disk capacity”.
[OK] button:

Displays the dialog box for checking the parameters of the logical disks expanded.

IV-54

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

Figure 7-46

Dialog Box for Checking the Parameters of the Logical Disks Expanded

[Yes] button: Starts expanding the capacity of the logical disks.
[No] button:
6.

Returns to the “LD Capacity Expansion” dialog.

When the capacity is successfully changed, the following message is displayed:

Figure 7-47

Message for Successful Completion of Expanding the Capacity

If the logical disks in the pool are in the following states, it is impossible to expand them.
1. Pairing is performed
Execute the expanding after removing these conditions.
2. The snapshot classification is set to BV, SV, LV, or SDV.

IV-55

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..22..33 U
Unnbbiinnddiinngg LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskkss
You can unbind logical disks from the “LD Individual Bind/Unbind” screen.

Figure 7-48

Unbinding Logical Disks


1.

Select a basic pool or dynamic pool in the configuration tree view.

2.

Click the [Logical Disk] tab on the detailed information view.

3.

Select a logical disk you want to remove from the list of logical disks in the detailed information view.

4.

Click the [LD Unbind] button.

IV-56

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

5.

A message box asking you to unbind the logical disk is displayed.

Figure 7-49

Message Box for Confirmation of Unbinding a Logical Disk

If the logical disks in the pool are in the following states, it is impossible to unbind them.
1. Managed by the Access Control (PORT mode).
2. Managed by the Access Control (WWN mode).
3. Pairing is performed.
4. Link setting is performed (snapshot).
5. Assigned to a cache segment (cache segment setting).
6. A reserve group is set (LD Administrator).
Execute the unbinding after removing these conditions.

6.

When the logical disk is successfully unbound, the following message is displayed.

Figure 7-50

Message for Successful Completion of Unbinding Logical Disks

IV-57

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..22..44 R
Reennaam
miinngg aa LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk
You can rename a logical disk from the “LD Individual Bind/Unbind” screen.

Figure 7-51

Renaming a Logical Disk


1.

Select a basic pool or dynamic pool in the configuration tree view.

2.

Click the [Logical Disk] tab on the detailed information view.

3.

Select a logical disk you want to remove from the list of logical disks in the detailed information view.

4.

Click the [Change Name] button.

IV-58

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

5.

The dialog for renaming a logical disk appears.

Figure 7-52

Dialog for Renaming a Logical Disk

(1)

The logical disk name must be unique in the system.

(Do not assign the same name twice or more.)

(2)

The initial value of the logical disk name field consists of 20 characters; 16 characters specific to the disk array
and 4 characters of the logical disk number.

(3)

Any logical disk name that does not conform to the following rules is invalid:
y Number of available characters:

1 to 24 characters

y Available characters:

Alphabet:

A to Z (a to z)
* Upper- and lower-case characters are distinguished.

Numerals:

0 to 9

Underbar:

_

Slash:

/

* All the characters must be 1-byte characters.

6.

When the logical disk is successfully renamed, the following message is displayed.

Figure 7-53

Message for Successful Completion of Renaming the Logical Disk

IV-59

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..22..55 C
Chhaannggiinngg TTiim
mee ttoo B
Biinndd LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskkss
You can change the duration of time to bind logical disks from the “LD Individual Bind/Unbind” screen.
You can change the time to bind logical disks which belong to a basic pool.

Figure 7-54

Changing the Time to Bind Logical Disks


1.

Select a basic pool in the configuration tree view.

2.

Click the [Logical Disk] tab on the detailed information view.

3.

Select a logical disk you want to remove from the list of logical disks in the detailed information view.

4.

Click the [Change Time] button.

IV-60

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

5.

The “Change Pool Rebuild/Expansion Time” dialog box appears.

Figure 7-55

Dialog Box for Changing the Time to Build Logical Disks

Specify the duration of time to bind the logical disks.

You can specify 0 to 24 hours.

Although specifying 0

binds the logical disks in the shortest time, select an appropriate time taking account of the load to the host I/O.
The time specified in the field is just a target, thus it is not assured to take the specified time.
6.

When the time is successfully changed, the following message is displayed:

Figure 7-56

Message for Successful Completion of Changing the Time

IV-61

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..22..66 LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk B
Baattcchh S
Seettttiinngg
Specify the same RAID type and logical disk capacity for the unused physical disks on the disk array.

The selectable

logical disk configuration is as follows:
• RAID6 (8+PQ)

The required number of physical disks is 10 or more, and the available capacity of the pool is
approximately 80% of the capacity of all the physical disks.

Batch binding logical disks is to make up logical disks collectively and easily by specifying some parameters about the
RAID type, the number of logical disks, and other related items.

This section describes the steps for batch binding

logical disks and some notes on doing that.
S400/S1400/S2400/S2800 disk array provides a wizard for binding logical disks collectively.
The batch binding wizard allows going through all the steps on unused physical disks from binding a pool to binding
the logical disks. The available capacity of the pool is the same with that of the logical disks.
with a configuration of RAID6 (8+PQ).

The pool is bound

Set other parameters for binding logical disks according to 7.2 “Method of

Binding Logical Disks”.

IV-62

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(1) Starting up the LD Batch Binding Wizard
To start up the LD Batch Binding Wizard, click the [LD Bind] button in the “Configuration- [Setting Mode]”
menu.

Figure 7-57

Starting up the LD Batch Binding Wizard

[Next] button:

Displays the “Number of Pools and Spares” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes
if agreed.

IV-63

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(2) Specifying the number of pools and the number of spares
Clicking the [Next] button on the initial screen of the LD Batch Binding Wizard displays the “Number of Pools
and Spares” screen.

Figure 7-58
Number of Pools:

Specifying the Number of Pools and Spares

Specify the number of pools you want to bind.
The pools you are going to bind need to be a dynamic pool which consists of 10 physical
disks.

Their configuration is set to RAID6 (8+PQ).

Number of PDs:

Specify the number of physical disks used to bind the pool(s).

Number of Spares:

Specify the number of spares you want to use.

[Next] button:

Displays the “Confirmation for Pool Binding Parameter” screen.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Welcome to the LD Batch Binding Wizard” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes
if agreed.

IV-64

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(3) Checking for the parameters specified for the pool(s)
Clicking the [Next] button on the “Number of Pools and Spares” screen displays the “Confirmation for Pool
Binding Parameter” screen.

Figure 7-59

Checking for the Parameters Specified for the Pool(s)

(A) Parameters for the pool(s)
Pool Type:

Type of the pool(s)

RAID Type:

RAID type of the pool(s)

Pool Capacity:

Capacity per pool

Number of Pools:

Number of pools to bind

Total Pool:

Total capacity of the pool(s) to bind

IV-65

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(B) Parameters for the physical disks
Number of Spares:

Number of spares to bind (in total)

Number of Unused:

Number of disks unused to bind the pool(s).
When you use the batch bind wizard, some physical disks remain unused depending
on the parameters specified in Number of Pools, Number of PDs, and Number of
Spares.

[Next] button:

Displays the “Binding Method” screen.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Number of Pools and Spares” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes
if agreed.

IV-66

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(4) Specifying the way of binding the logical disks
Clicking the [Next] button on the “Confirmation for Pool Binding Parameter” screen displays the “Binding
Method” screen.

Figure 7-60

Specifying the Way of Binding Logical Disks

Specify one of the following ways of binding the logical disks:
•

Only specify the number of LDs
Specify the number of logical disks to bind per pool.

•

Only specify LD capacity
Specify the capacity of each of the logical disks to bind per pool. You can specify a recommended capacity,
set the capacity same with that of a logical disk already bound, or directly designate any value for the
capacity.

•

Specify both the number of LDs and LD capacity
Specify any desired values for the number of logical disks and the capacity of one logical disk.

IV-67

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

[Next] button:

One of the following screens is displayed according to the specified way of binding the
logical disks:
•

Check-marking on [Only specify the number of LDs]:
Displays the “Specify Number of LDs” screen.

•

Check-marking on [Only specify LD capacity]:
Displays the “Specify the Capacity” screen.

•

Check-marking on [Specify both the number of LDs and LD capacity]:
Displays the “Specify Number of LDs and LD Capacity” screen.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Confirmation for Pool Binding Parameter” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes
if agreed.

Although the capacity specified in the field is that of the region you can use, there are some region for controlling
the disks of the pools in addition to the region usable by the user.

IV-68

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(5)-1 Specifying the number of logical disks
Check-marking on [Only specify the number of LDs] on the “Binding Method” screen and clicking the [Next]
button displays the “Specify Number of LDs” screen.

Figure 7-61
Number of LDs:

Specifying the Number of Logical Disks

Specify the number of logical disks to bind.
The capacity of each logical disk is set in the unit of 1 GB, and the maximum available
capacity for the logical disks is automatically calculated.

In addition to that, there is the

number of logical disks to bind in one pool, thus the number of logical disks actually
bound is the specified number multiplied by the number of pools.
[Next] button:

Displays the “Setting Detail Parameter for LD Binding” screen.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Binding Method” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes
if agreed.

IV-69

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(5)-2 Specifying the logical disk capacity
Check-marking on [Only specify LD capacity] on the “Binding Method” screen and clicking the [Next] button
displays the “Specify the Capacity” screen.

Figure 7-62

Specifying the Logical Disk Capacity

Use one of the following ways of specifying the capacity of the logical disks to bind:
•

Specify recommend LD capacity
Specify one of the recommended values for the capacity of the logical disks to bind from the pull-down menu.

•

Specify existing LD
Select a logical disk already bound to apply the capacity of the logical disk.

You can select a logical disk in

the “LD Specification” screen by clicking the [Reference] button. (Refer to Figure 7-64 “Screen for
Specifying a Logical Disk”.)
•

Specify LD capacity
Specify the capacity in units of 1 GB directly.

The number of logical disks allowed to bind is automatically

calculated according to the value of the capacity you specified.

IV-70

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

Note that specifying a recommended capacity makes the capacity occupied by the pool larger than the capacity of
the logical disks by 0.2 GB approximately and maximum.
For details, refer to Appendix D “Notes on Use for Data Replication”.

[Next] button:

Displays the “Setting Detail Parameter for LD Binding” screen.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Binding Method” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes
if agreed.

IV-71

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(5)-3 Specifying the number of logical disks and the logical disk capacity
Check-marking on [Specify both the number of LDs and LD capacity] on the “Binding Method” screen and
clicking the [Next] button displays the “Specify Number of LDs and LD Capacity” screen.

Figure 7-63

Specifying the Number of Logical Disks and Logical Disk Capacity

Specify the number of logical disks according to (5)-1.
Specify the capacity of the logical disks according to (5)-2.
[Next] button:

Displays the “Setting Detail Parameter for LD Binding” screen.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Binding Method” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes
if agreed.

Selecting a logical disk and clicking the [Reference] button displays the following screen:

IV-72

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

Figure 7-64

Screen for Specifying a Logical Disk

By selecting a logical disk from the list, you can bind the logical disks setting their capacities same with it.

For

an unselectable logical disk, either of the following reasons is indicated in the “Not Specify Reason” column:
•

Excess of capacity:
The capacity of the logical disk is exceeding the unused space of the pool.

•

Capacity unit disagreement:
It is not possible to bind logical disks setting the same capacity with that of this logical disk.

For detailed

reasons for mismatching capacity units and details on binding logical disks with a RAID configuration
different from those in use, refer to Appendix D “Notes on Use for Data Replication”.
[OK] button:

Applies the parameter you specified on this screen, and displays back the screen on which
you specified the capacity of the logical disks or the number of logical disks and their
capacity.

[Cancel] button:

Displays back the screen on which you specified the capacity of the logical disks or the
number of logical disks and their capacity.
are canceled.

IV-73

All parameters you specified on this screen

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

It is allowed to change the logical disk number selection displayed through this wizard or number displayed on the
LD specification screen to the name of the logical disk. For details, refer to “Client Start/Stop” in the “User’s
Manual” or “User’s Manual (UNIX)” in accordance with the OS in use.

Note that selecting detailed view in the LD

specification screen switches the positions of the numbers and the logical disk names.

IV-74

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(6) Specifying the detailed settings of the logical disks
The “Setting Detail Parameter for LD Binding” screen allows checking for the format, name, and initial number
of the logical disks, and the time to bind them.

Figure 7-65
OS Type/Name:

Specifying the Detailed Settings of the Logical Disks

You can specify the format and name of the logical disks to bind. The logical disk name
must be unique in the system.

(Do not assign the same name twice or more.)

Therefore,

when you bind multiple sets of logical disks simultaneously, the logical disks are named
with the character string specified and automatically numbered in order.
The initial value of the logical disk name field consists of 20 characters; 16 characters
specific to the disk array and 4 characters of the logical disk number.

When you do not

make any change for logical disk name, the initial value is used in the form mentioned
above:
Example: 200000004C518CAC0000, 200000004C518CAC0001, ...
Not changing the logical disk format displays a blank in the OS Type field.
Note that inputting a blank to the format sets the initial values for shipment;

a blank in

the OS Type field and 16 characters specific to the disk array + 4 characters of the logical

IV-75

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

disk number in the Name field.
Table 7-2 lists the selectable logical disk formats.
You can change the logical disk format and name later from the main window on the iSM
client or according to 7.2.4 “Renaming a Logical Disk”.
Table 7-2 List of Formats
Description

Format

(1)

A2

Logical disk operated on the ACOS-2 system

A4

Logical disk operated on the ACOS-4 system
format, ask our maintenance engineer.)

AX

Logical disk operated on the AIX system

CX

Logical disk operated on the Solaris system

LX

Logical disk operated on the Linux system

NX

Logical disk operated on the HP-UX system

WN

Logical disk operated on the Windows system

(If you are setting this

Any logical disk name that does not conform to the following rules is invalid:
• Number of available characters:

1 to 24 characters

• Available characters:

Alphabet:

A to Z (a to z)
* Upper- and lower-case characters are distinguished.

Numerals:

0 to 9

Underbar:

_

Slash:

/

* All the characters must be 1-byte characters.
(2)

An invalid specification applies the logical disk name to be assigned by default.

(3)

On the ACOS-4 system, use the logical disk id names same with those on the host.

For details about the format A4, refer to Appendix G “ACOS-4 Resource Operation Guard”.

Start Number:

A number which is equal to or higher than the specified logical disk number and still
unused is assigned.
When this parameter is omitted (or if the specified number is invalid), the number
subsequent to the largest logical disk number already occupied is assigned.

IV-76

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

For example, when logical disk numbers 0, 1, 3, and 4 are in use, new logical disks are
numbered as follows:

[Change] button:

When omitted:

5,6,7...

When 0 specified:

2,5,6...

When 10 specified:

10,11,12...

Displays the screen which allows changing parameters.

(Refer to Figure 7-66 “Change

Parameter Screen”.)
[Next] button:

Displays a message asking you to proceed.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Specify Number of LDs”, “Specify the Capacity”, or “Specify Number
of LDs and LD Capacity” screen

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes
if agreed.

Clicking the [Change] button on the “Setting Detail Parameter for LD Binding” screen displays the following
screen:

IV-77

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

Figure 7-66
[OK] button:

Change Parameter Screen

Displays back the screen for specifying the details of the logical disks with the
parameter(s) you changed.

[Cancel] button:

Displays back the screen for specifying the details of the logical disks.
changes you made on this screen are canceled.

IV-78

All parameter

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(7) Checking for the parameters for batch binding the logical disks
Clicking the [Next] button on the “Setting Detail Parameter for LD Binding” screen displays the “Confirmation
for LD Batch Binding Parameter” screen.

Check for the parameters specified for batch binding the logical disks,

then click the [Next] button to start binding the pool(s) and the logical disks.

Figure 7-67

Checking for the Parameters of Batch Binding the Logical Disks

(A) Parameters for the pool(s)
Pool Type:

Type of the pool(s)

RAID Type:

RAID type of the pool(s)

Pool Capacity:

Capacity per pool

Number of Pools:

Number of pools to bind

Total Pool Capacity:

Total capacity of the pool(s) to bind

Total Unused Pool Capacity: Capacity which is not used for binding the logical disks in the pool to bind

IV-79

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(B) Parameters for the logical disks
LD Capacity:

Capacity of each of the logical disks to bind

Number of LDs:

Number of logical disks to bind
Number of all logical disks to bind

Total LD Capacity:

Total amount of all logical disks to bind
“LD Capacity” × “Number of LDs” = “Total LD Capacity”

OS Type:

Format of the logical disks to bind

LD Name(Prefix):

Name of the logical disks to bind

LD Start Number:

Initial number of the logical disks to bind

(C) Parameters for the physical disks
Number of Spares:

Number of spares to bind (in total)

Number of Unused:

Number of disks unused to bind the pool(s)
When you use the batch bind wizard, some physical disks remain unused depending
on the parameters specified in “Number of Pools”, “Number of PDs”, and “Number of
Spares”.

[Next] button:

Displays a message asking you to proceed.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Setting Detail Parameter for LD Binding” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard
closes if agreed.

Figure 7-68

Message for Asking To Proceed

IV-80

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

Insufficient license capacity
Binding or expanding pools may result in insufficiency of license capacity due to the increased capacity. For
insufficiency of license capacity, refer to Page IV-19.

IV-81

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(8) Finishing batch binding the logical disks
On successful completion, the following screen is displayed:

Figure 7-69

Successful Completion of LD Batch Binding

Note that successful completion in this section means that the sequence to bind the logical disks started
successfully. Thus, you need to check that the logical disks are correctly set up from the main window of the
iSM client.
[Finish] button:

Closes the wizard.

IV-82

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

On unsuccessful completion, the following screen is displayed:

Figure 7-70

Screen On Unsuccessful Completion

Possible causes of an LD batch binding failure may be a communication error between the iSM server and the
iSM client, a problem in the disk array, and so forth. If a communication error is the cause of unsuccessful
completion, the instruction to do batch binding the logical disks has been correctly issued, thus re-connect the
iSM client and check for the communication between them.

If there may be an error in the disk array, check the

operation records in which the iSM server is logging errors. Then, take an appropriate measure for the error
according to the iSM server log, then try to redo batch binding the logical disks.

IV-83

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..33 B
Biin
nd
diin
ng
g aa S
Sp
paarree
77..33..11 B
Biinnddiinngg aa S
Sppaarree
Bind spare disks on the disk array through wizard.

You can bind spare disks following the steps on the wizard.

(1) Starting up the spare binding wizard
Click the [Spare Binding] button in the “LD Individual Bind/Unbind” screen.

Figure 7-71

Starting Up the Spare Binding Wizard

IV-84

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(2) Setting about the spare binding wizard
Clicking the [Spare Binding] button on the “LD Individual Bind/Unbind” screen displays the “Welcome to the
Spare Binding Wizard” screen.

Figure 7-72

Setting about the Spare Binding Wizard

[Next] button:

Displays the “PD Selection” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes if
agreed.

IV-85

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(3) Selecting physical disks
Clicking the [Next] button on the “Welcome to the Spare Binding Wizard” screen displays the “PD Selection”
screen.

Figure 7-73 Selecting Physical Disks
Unused PDs:

Allows selecting unused physical disk(s) to be used as spare disks.

Spares:

Lists spare disks to be bound on the disk array.

[Add] button:

Select unused physical disk(s) to be used as spare disks, then click this button to add them as
spares.

[Delete] button:

Select any physical disks you do not want to use as spares, then click this button. The
selected physical disks are restored to the list of unused physical disks.

[Next] button:

Displays the “Confirmation for Spare Binding Parameter” screen.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “Welcome to the Spare Binding Wizard” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes if
agreed.

IV-86

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(4) Checking for the parameters specified for the spare
Clicking the [Next] button on the “PD Selection” screen displays the “Confirmation for Spare Binding Parameter”
screen.

Figure 7-74
Spares:

Checking for the Parameters Specified for a Spare

List of physical disks assigned as spares.

Number of Spares: Indicates the number of physical disks assigned as spares.
[Next] button:

Displays a message asking you to proceed.

[Back] button:

Displays back the “PD Selection” screen.

[Cancel] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes if
agreed.

IV-87

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

Figure 7-75

Message Box to Start Binding the Spare

(5) Finishing binding the spare
When the spare is successfully bound, the following screen is displayed:

Figure 7-76 Spare Successfully Bound
[Finish] button:

Displays a confirmation to ask whether you want to quit the wizard, then the wizard closes if
agreed.

IV-88

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..33..22 U
Unnbbiinnddiinngg aa S
Sppaarree
You can unbind spares out of the disk array from the “LD Individual Bind/Unbind” screen.

Figure 7-77

Unbinding a Spare


1.

Select Spare in the configuration tree view.

2.

Select a spare you want to unbind out of the array from the list of spares in the detailed information view.

3.

Click the [Spare Unbind] button.

IV-89

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

4.

A message box asking you to unbind the spare is displayed.

Figure 7-78
5.

Message Box for Unbinding Spare

When the spare is successfully unbound, the following message is displayed.

Figure 7-79

Message for Successful Completion of Unbinding the Spare

IV-90

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..44 E
Exxp
pllaan
naattiio
on
no
off C
Co
on
nffiig
gu
urraattiio
on
nS
Seettttiin
ng
g
S
Sccrreeeen
n
77..44..11 LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk B
Biinnddiinngg LLiisstt S
Sccrreeeenn
Clicking the [LD Bind/Unbind] button on “Configuration - [Setting Mode]” displays the following screen.

This

section provides the description of the items displayed on this screen according to the alphabets encircled on the figure
shown below. For details about operations, refer to the following sections:
y To handle a pool:

Refer to 7.1 “Pool Binding”.

y To handle logical disks:
y To handle a spare:

Refer to 7.2 “Method of Binding Logical Disks”.

Refer to 7.3 “Binding a Spare”.

y To handle a snapshot:

Refer to the “Snapshot User’s Manual (Function Guide)” (IS030).

(A)
(B)

(C)

Figure 7-80

Logical Disk Configuration Screen (LD Individual Bind/Unbind Screen)

IV-91

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(A)

Configuration tree view
The configuration tree view shows disk configurations in the disk array, classifying them into four categories in
the form of a tree:
y Dynamic Pool
Indicates dynamic pool(s) already bound in the disk array.
y Basic Pool
Indicates basic pool(s) already bound in the disk array.
y Spare
Indicates spare(s) already bound in the disk array.
y Unused
Indicates physical disk(s) that remain unassigned to any pool or spare.

(B)

Detailed information view
The detailed information view shows any of the following information according to the selection in the
configuration tree view:

The number of basic pools, number of dynamic pools, number of spares, and number of unused logical disks are
displayed by the category.

Pools already bound are listed.
y [Pool] tab
The [Pool] tab shows the name, RAID type, capacity, and so forth about the pool selected.

You can expand

the capacity of the pool, rename it, change the rebuild time, and unbind the pool on this tab.

Detailed information about the pool is displayed on the [Logical Disk] tab and [Physical Disk] tab:
y [Logical Disk] tab
The [Logical Disk] tab shows a list of logical disks bound in the pool.

You can expand the capacity of the

logical disks, rename it, or unbind the logical disks on this tab.
y [Physical Disk] tab
The [Physical Disk] tab shows a list of physical disks that compose the pool.

Pools already bound are listed.
y [Pool] tab
The [Pool] tab shows the name, RAID type, capacity, and so forth about the pool selected.
the pool, change the rebuild time, and unbind the pool on this tab.

IV-92

You can rename

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting


Detailed information about the pool is displayed on the [Logical Disk] tab and [Physical Disk] tab:
y [Logical Disk] tab
The [Logical Disk] tab shows a list of logical disks bound in the pool.

You can rename the logical disks,

change the format time, and unbind the logical disks on this tab.
y [Physical Disk] tab
The [Physical Disk] tab shows a list of physical disks that compose the pool.

The spares already set up are listed.

You can unbind spares on this screen.


Physical disk(s) that remain unassigned to any pool or spare are listed.
(C)

Binding Wizard area
This area provides the following buttons for binding a pool, logical disks, and a spare:
y [Pool Binding] button
Starts the wizard for binding a pool.

Bind a new pool following the steps on the wizard.

y [LD Binding] button
Starts the wizard for binding logical disks.

Bind logical disks following the steps on the wizard. For details

on how to bind logical disks, refer to 7.2.1 “Binding Logical Disks”.
y [Spare Binding] button
Starts the wizard for binding a spare.

Set an unused physical disk as a spare following the steps on the wizard.

For

details on how to bind a spare, refer to 0 “
Binding a Spare”.
The following buttons start a wizard for binding a volume for snapshot operation. These buttons are available
with a valid DynamicSnapVolume license
For how to bind volumes, refer to the “Snapshot User’s Manual (Function Guide)” (IS030).
y [SRA Binding] button
Starts the wizard for binding an SRA (snapshot reserve area).

Bind a new SRA following the steps on the

wizard.
y [Generation Adding] button
Starts the wizard for adding a generation.

Add a generation following the steps on the wizard.

y [LV Binding] button
Starts the wizard for binding a link-volume.

Bind a link-volume following the steps on the wizard.

IV-93

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..44..22 LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk C
Coonnffiigguurraattiioonn S
Sccrreeeenn
Selecting a disk configuration in the logical disk configuration screen shows a list of constituents of the disk array.

Figure 7-81

Logical Disk Configuration Screen (LD Individual Bind/Unbind Screen)

The detailed information view displays the following information:
y Type:

Constituents of the disk array (basic pool, dynamic pool, spare, and unused)

y Number of Elements:

Number of constituents by the type

IV-94

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..44..33 P
Pooooll LLiisstt V
Viieew
w
Selecting Basic Pool or Dynamic Pool in the configuration tree view shows the pool list view.

(1) [Pool] tab
For each of the pools displayed, you can expand its capacity, change its rebuild time, rename it, and unbind it on
this tab.

If you select Dynamic Pool for using snapshots, you can expand the snapshot reserve area (SRA),

change the threshold, and unbind the snapshot reserve area (SRA).

For operation of snapshots, refer to the

“Snapshot User’s Manual (Function Guide)”.

Figure 7-82

Pool List View - [Pool] Tab

The pool list view displays the following information:
y Number:

Number of the pool (hexadecimal, 4 digits)

y Pool Name:

Name of the pool (up to 32 characters)

y RAID:

RAID type of the pool

y Capacity[GB]:

Capacity of the pool (up to one decimal place)

y Used Capacity[GB]:

Capacity used by the logical disks in the pool (up to one decimal place)

IV-95

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

y Snapshot Capacity [GB]:

Capacity bound as a snapshot reserve area (up to one decimal place)

y Snapshot Used Capacity [GB]:

Capacity used by the snapshot (up to one decimal place)

y Snapshot Threshold [GB]:

Specified threshold capacity for the snapshot used capacity (up to one
decimal place)

y Number of LDs:

Number of logical disks used in the pool

y Number of PDs:

Number of physical disks that compose the pool

IV-96

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..44..44 P
Pooooll IInnffoorrm
maattiioonn V
Viieew
w
Selecting a basic pool or dynamic pool in the configuration tree view shows the pool info view.

You can see the

information about the pool by the physical disk and logical disk.

(1) [Logical Disk] tab
The [Logical Disk] tab shows a list of logical disks used in the pool.

For the logical disks displayed, you can

expand their capacity, change the rebuild time, rename them, and unbind them on this tab.

If you select

Dynamic Pool for using snapshots, you can unbind generations. For operation of snapshots, refer to the
“Snapshot User’s Manual (Function Guide)” (IS030).

Figure 7-83

Pool Information View - [Logical Disk] Tab

The [Logical Disk] tab displays the following information.

However, [Snapshot Type] and [RPL Type] are

displayed only when each license is canceled.
y Number:

Number of the logical disk (hexadecimal, 4 digits)

y OS Type:

Format of the logical disk

y LD Name:

Name of the logical disk (up to 24 characters)

IV-97

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

y Capacity [GB]:

Capacity of the logical disk (up to one decimal place)

y Snapshot Type:

Type of the use of the snapshot
Blank:

Volume that is not used for snapshots

BV:

Base-volume. This volume has a snapshot generation.

LV:

Link-volume. This volume is necessary for substantiating snapshot
generations, etc.

SDV:

Snapshot-data-volume.

This is a special logical disk configuring a snapshot

reserve area (SRA).
SV:

Snapshot-volume.

SV*:

A type of snapshot-volume, which is an illegal volume that is not set as a
generation.

This is a snapshot generation volume.

As this volume cannot be used for a snapshot, unbind the logical

disk.
y RPL Type:

Type of the volume used for replication
Blank:

Cannot be used as a replication volume.

IV:

Not used as a replication volume.

MV:

Used as the copy-source volume.

RV:

Used as the copy-destination volume.

RV/MV:

Used as both RV and MV.

IV-98

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

(2) [Physical Disk] tab
The [Physical Disk] tab shows a list of physical disks used in the pool.

Figure 7-84

Pool Information View - [Physical Disk] Tab

The [Physical Disk] tab displays the following information:
y Number:

Number of the physical disk
PD group number (hexadecimal, 2 digits) + PD number (hexadecimal, 2 digits)

y Capacity [GB]:

Capacity of the physical disk (up to one decimal place)

IV-99

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..44..55 S
Sppaarree LLiisstt V
Viieew
w
Selecting Spare in the configuration tree view shows a list of spares.

Figure 7-85

You can unbind spares on this screen.

Spare List View

The spare list view displays the following information:
y Number:

Number of the physical disk
PD group number (hexadecimal, 2 digits) + PD number (hexadecimal, 2 digits)

y Capacity [GB]:

Capacity of the physical disk (up to one decimal place)

IV-100

Chapter 7 Disk Array Configuration Setting

77..44..66 U
Unnuusseedd D
Diisskk LLiisstt V
Viieew
w
Selecting Unused in the configuration tree view shows a list of unused disks.

Figure 7-86

Unused Disk List View

The unused disk list view displays the following information:
y Number:

Number of the physical disk
PD group number (hexadecimal, 2 digits) + PD number (hexadecimal, 2 digits)

y Capacity [GB]:

Capacity of the physical disk (up to one decimal place)

IV-101

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting
(S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/
S2300)
This chapter describes how to set the configuration of the disk array in S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300. For
configuration setting in S400/S1400/S2400/S2800, refer to Chapter 7.

88..11 B
Biin
nd
diin
ng
g aa R
RA
AN
NK
K
The RANK is bound by specifying the physical disks and the RAID type for binding RAID from the physical disks
installed on the disk array. Then, for the RANK thus bound, logical disks can be bound by binding logical disks.
When extending physical disks, logical disks can be bound for the extended physical disks in accordance with the same
procedure, thus not affecting the logical disks on other RANKs already in use.

Even when new logical disks are

additionally bound for the same RANK, they do not affect the already bound logical disks.
Regarding LD binding, selections can be made from the following configurations, thus making possible a different
configuration for each RANK.
Logical disk configuration:

RAID1

(1+1)

RAID5

(2+P)/(3+P)/(4+P)/(5+P)/(6+P)/
(7+P)/(8+P)/(9+P)/(10+P)/(11+P)/
(12+P)/(13+P)/(14+P)

*

RAID0

1/3/5/10/15

RAID10

(2+2)/(3+3)/(4+4)/(5+5)/(6+6)/(7+7)

Only Windows and Solaris can specify RAID0. However, do not use RAID0 in a highly reliable system (e.g.,
cluster environment) because RAID0 has no redundancy.

Logical disks are bound for the 3000/4000 series disk array when it is initially installed.

IV-102

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

To bind logical disks, refer to the following descriptions.
RANK Bind (8.1.1)
RANK Unbind (8.1.2)
Expanding a RANK (8.1.3)
Setting RANK Rebuild Time (8.1.4)

Figure 8-1

RANK/Spare Tab Screen

IV-103

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..11..11 R
RA
AN
NK
KB
Biinndd
Selecting unused PDs enables this button, thus making it possible to bind RANKs.

Refer to Figure 8-1 “RANK/Spare

Tab Screen”.

Button Enabled
Select Unused PDs.
Figure 8-2

RANK Bind

Click the [RANK Bind] button to display the following dialog.

(a)

(b)

Figure 8-3

RANK Bind Confirmation Dialog

RAID types satisfying the following conditions can be specified:
•

RAID type supported by the disk array

•

RAID type of a RANK that can be bound with the selected number of physical disks

IV-104

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

The following message is displayed if there are no RAID types of RANKs that can be bound with the selected
number of physical disks.

Figure 8-4

Message if Binding a RANK is Impossible

To bind a RANK, click the [OK] button in the RANK Bind confirmation dialog box.

Binding a RANK does not

take much time.
(a) and (b) in the diagram are described below.
(a)

RAID Type
The selectable RAID type varies depending on the number of selected PDs. The list is shown in Table 8-1
for your reference.
Table 8-1

Selectable RAID Types
Selected PD Count

RAID Type

Target Disk

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Array
RAID0

100/1000/2000

√

-

√

-

√

-

-

-

-

√

-

-

-

-

√

RAID1

Series

-

√

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

RAID5

-

-

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

RAID10

-

-

-

√

-

√

-

√

-

√

-

√

-

√

-

√: Select enable
(b)

-: Select disable

Rebuild Time
Specifies the maximum time required for rebuilding the RANK. It is possible to select 0 to 24 hours as
Rebuild Time. Select 0 to perform rebuilding in the shortest amount of time. In consideration of the host
I/O load, set a suitable value for Rebuild Time. Moreover, the time is an indication and it does not always
take the time as specified.

IV-105

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..11..22 R
RA
AN
NK
KU
Unnbbiinndd
Selecting a RANK from the PD window or the RANK window on the RANK/Spare Tab screen (Figure 8-1) enables
RANK Unbind.

Even during LD binding, it is possible to unbind LDs.

Unbind Button Enabled

Selecting a RANK

Figure 8-5 RANK Unbind
If LDs are already bound in the RANK to unbind, a message as follows will appear asking whether to unbind the LDs
or not.

IV-106

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

Figure 8-6

RANK/LD Unbind Check

Select [Yes] to unbind the LDs and RANK.

If LDs in the RANK are in the following states, it is impossible to unbind them.
1.

Managed by the Access Control (PORT Mode).

2.

Managed by the Access Control (WWN Mode)

3.

Pairing is performed.

Execute the unbinding after removing these conditions.

IV-107

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..11..33 E
Exxppaannddiinngg aa R
RA
AN
NK
K
Selecting unused PDs after selecting the RAID5 RANK from the PD window or the RANK window on the
RANK/Spare Tab screen (Figure 8-1) enables the [Capacity Expansion] button.
* Only Windows and Solaris can use this function.

RANK
Unused PDs
Button Enabled

Figure 8-7

Capacity Expansion

Click the [Capacity Expansion] button to display the following dialog.

(a)

Figure 8-8

Capacity Expansion Confirmation Dialog

Click the [OK] button to execute the capacity expansion.

IV-108

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

(a) Expansion Time
Specifies the maximum time required for rebuilding the RANK. It is possible to select 0 to 24 hours as Rebuild
Time.

When 0 is specified, the rebuilding is performed at the maximum speed.

Moreover, the time is an

indication and it does not always take the time as specified.
When extending multiple physical disks, extend them one by one. Make sure that the extension of one disk has
been completed before extending the next physical disk.
When the capacity expansion is successful, end the configuration setting and check the iSM client screen until the
completion.

As shown in Figure 8-9, the expansion is completed when the display is changed from “Attn.

(expanding)” to “Ready”.

Figure 8-9

Capacity Expansion State

IV-109

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..11..44 S
Seettttiinngg R
RA
AN
NK
KR
Reebbuuiilldd TTiim
mee
(1) Change Rebuild Time
By Change Rebuild Time, it is possible to change the data rebuild time when the failure occurs at the RANK
selected on the RANK/Spare Tab screen (Figure 8-1).
Selecting RANKs from the PD window or the RANK window enables [Change Rebuild Time].

RANK Selected

Button Enabled

Figure 8-10

Change Rebuild Time

Click the [Change Rebuild Time] button to display the following dialog.

Figure 8-11

Change Rebuild Time Setting

Changing the Rebuild Time and then clicking the [OK] button result in changing the Rebuild Time.
Rebuild Time, 0 to 24 hours can be selected.

For the

Select 0 to perform rebuilding in the shortest amount of time.

consideration of the host I/O load, set a suitable value for Rebuild Time.

IV-110

In

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

The RANK Rebuild Time is specified during RANK building. Here, considering the host I/O load, the Rebuild Time
can be changed.

(2) Rebuild Start Instruction
If one of the physical disks configuring a logical disk fails, the logical disk is placed in the Reduce state and the
RANK which includes this logical disk is also placed in the Reduce state.

When the RANK is in the Reduce

state, data can be rebuilt during operations by using the [Rebuild Start Instruction].
The [Rebuild Start Instruction] button is enabled when a reduced RANK is selected in the PD window or RANK
window and when a spare disk is selected in this status.
To confirm the reduced status of a RANK, display the main screen of the iSM client.

Reducing RANK and Spare Selected
Button Enabled

Figure 8-12

Rebuild Start Instruction

IV-111

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

Click the [Rebuild Start Instruction] button to display the following dialog.
Only reducing RANK selected

Reducing RANK and Spare selected

(a)
(b)

(c)

Figure 8-13

Rebuild Start Instruction Confirmation

Click the [OK] button to start rebuilding.
(a), (b), and (c) in the diagram are described.
(a)

Information
The specified RANK and PD group are displayed.
When this dialog is output by selecting the spare, the spare for rebuilding is displayed.

(b)

Target PD
When only reducing RANK is selected, it is necessary to specify the rebuild target disk.
* Rebuild Instruction
Target Disk Number contains the PD number configuring the RANK.

Therefore, when the PD is

replaced with a normal PD, specify the PD number.
* Instruction of Rebuild to Spare Disk
For the Instruction of Rebuild to Spare Disks, the Spare disk is automatically determined by the disk array.
Therefore, specify the target disk number by entering the number of the failed physical disk.

IV-112

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

(c)

Rebuild Time
Specifies the maximum time required for rebuilding the RANK. It is possible to select 0 to 24 hours as
Rebuild Time. Select 0 to perform rebuilding in the shortest amount of time. In consideration of the host
I/O load, set a suitable value for Rebuild Time. Moreover, the time is an indication and it does not always
take the time as specified.

Change the RANK Rebuild Time by using the “Change Rebuild Time” previously described.

If LDs are not bound on the RANK, the rebuild start instruction fails.

IV-113

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..22 M
Meetth
ho
od
do
off B
Biin
nd
diin
ng
gL
Lo
og
giiccaall D
Diisskkss
To bind logical disks, refer to the following descriptions.
Binding Logical Disks (8.2.1)
Unbinding Logical Disks (8.2.2)
Setting Logical Disk Bind Time (8.2.3)
Logical Disk Batch Setting (8.2.4)

Figure 8-14

LD Individual Bind/Unbind

IV-114

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..22..11 B
Biinnddiinngg LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskkss
In this dialog, LD binding/unbinding can be performed. The operation can be performed by using the popup menu
(right-click) or the buttons on the screen after selecting a logical disk or free space of RANK on the LD Individual
Bind/Unbind screen (Figure 8-14).
Selecting a free space of RANK will enable the [LD Bind] button.

Unused Selected

Button Enabled

Figure 8-15

LD Bind

Click the [LD Bind] button to display the following screen.

(a)

(d)

(b)

(c)

Figure 8-16

LD Bind Dialog

Clicking the [OK] button after specifying the required particulars in this screen will start the LD binding.

IV-115

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

(a), (b), (c), and (d) in the screen are described as follows.
(a)

General Setting
y LD Setting
The number of LDs and the LD Capacity are specified here.

It is also possible to specify either of them.

When only the number of LD is specified, the maximum capacity that can be created is automatically
calculated.
When only the LD Capacity is specified, the maximum number of logical disks that can be created is
calculated.
If having specified LD Capacity, you can either enter a numeric value or specify a bound logical disk.
To bind logical disks having the same capacity as for a bound one, you should select [Only specify LD
capacity].

Logical disks having the same capacity are necessary for using the data replication function*.

Clicking the [Reference] button in Figure 8-16 displays the screen below.

Figure 8-17

LD Specification Screen

The figure shows an example of binding logical disks by selecting 10 GB of free space for the RANK of RAID5
(3+P).
Selecting a logical disk from the list makes it possible to bind another logical disk having the same capacity as
that selected one.

If a logical disk cannot be selected, the “Not Specify Reason” field displays one of the

reasons:

IV-116

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

y

Excess of capacity:
The capacity of this logical disk exceeds the free space of the RANK.

y

Capacity unit disagreement:
No logical disk can be bound that will have the same capacity as this logical disk.

For detailed reasons for capacity unit disagreement or information on binding logical disks having a different
configuration from the already bound RAID configuration, refer to Appendix D “Notes on Use for Data
Replication”.

The logical disk number selection in the LD Bind dialog and the number display item in the LD specification screen
can be replaced with logical disk names.

For information on the settings, refer to “Client Start/Stop” in the “User’s

Manual” or “User’s Manual (UNIX)” in accordance with the OS in use.

Note that, if the detailed display is

selected for the LD specification screen, the display order of the numbers and logical disk names in the list is
changed.

*
(b)

Refer to the “Data Replication User’s Manual (Function Guide)” (IS015) for the data replication function.
Setup of Ownership
At Cross Call OFF, the controller must be specified.
At Cross Call ON, this setting is disabled; however, settings are made with controller 0.
on the Cross Call, refer to 8.5.1 “Cross Call and Auto Assignment”.

For information

For information on the LD Ownership,

refer to 8.5.2 “Ownership”.
(c)

Setting LD Type/Name
For the logical disks to be bound, it is also possible to simultaneously set its type and name.
The LD name needs to be unique in the system (no two names are allowed).

Therefore, when binding two

or more logical disks, LD names consisting of a specified character string to which a sequence number is a
sequential number is added are automatically given.
Example: DiskName0000, DiskName0001, DiskName0002 ...
The details of item are the same as (G) “Setting LD Type/Name” of 8.2.4 “Logical Disk Batch Setting”.
(d)

Detailed Setup
y Start LD Number
An unused numbers following the specified LD Number is allocated.

When omitted (with Start LD

Number disabled), the number immediately after the maximum among the LD Numbers in use is
allocated.
Example: The numbers allocated when LD Numbers 0, 1, 3 and 4 exist are as follows.

IV-117

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

Omitted:

5, 6, 7...

0 specified:

2, 5, 6...

10 specified:

10, 11, 12...

y Format Time
Specifies the maximum LD Format Time.
It is possible to select 0 to 24 hours as Format Time. When 0 is specified, the formatting is performed at
the maximum speed. Moreover, the time is an indication and it does not always take the time as specified.
The specified time is the standard time required. However, the actual execution time varies with the load of the
disk array.

Specify 0 to complete the LD binding at the maximum speed. If the business operation I/O is preferred, specify a
large value (such as 24) to lower the load to the Disk Array.

IV-118

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..22..22 U
Unnbbiinnddiinngg LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskkss
Selecting a bound LD enables the [LD Unbind] button.
LD Selected

Button Enabled

Figure 8-18

LD Unbind

Click the [LD Unbind] button to display a message box as shown below.

Figure 8-19

LD Unbind Confirmation Message

Select [Yes] from this screen to unbind the logical disk.

If the logical disks are in the following states, it is impossible to unbind them.
1.

Managed by the Access Control (PORT mode).

2.

Managed by the Access Control (WWN mode).

3.

Pairing is performed.

Execute the unbinding after removing these conditions.

IV-119

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..22..33 S
Seettttiinngg LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk B
Biinndd TTiim
mee
Changes the format time of logical disks being bound.
This setting, which acts upon the whole disk array, is unrelated to selecting a logical disk.

Clicking this button

displays a dialog box as shown below, thus making it possible to change the Format Time.
Specifies the maximum required Format Time.
It is possible to select 0 to 24 hours as Format Time.
maximum speed.

When 0 is specified, the formatting is performed at the

Moreover, the time is an indication and it does not always take the time as specified.

Figure 8-20

Change Format Time Dialog

Specify 0 to complete the LD binding at the maximum speed.
large value (such as 24) to lower the load to the Disk Array.

IV-120

If the business operation I/O is preferred, specify a

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..22..44 LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk B
Baattcchh S
Seettttiinngg
All the physical disks or unused physical disks mounted on the disk array are specified and all the logical disks are
bound in the same RAID type with the same LD Capacity.

Please note that when binding all physical disks, if the

required data has been stored in the operating disk array, the data recorded in all the logical disks in use is erased.
Please be careful about it.

If the data in use are necessary, select unused physical disks or bind logical disks newly

from unused physical disks through individual bind.
There are the following four logical disk configurations which can be selected.
•

High reliability: RAID1 (1+1)

Consisting of two PDs, the RANK Capacity is the same as that of about one
PD.

•

Standard:

RAID5 (4+P)

Consisting of five PDs, the RANK Capacity is the same as that of about four
PDs.

•

Large capacity: RAID5 (6+P)

Consisting of seven PDs, the RANK Capacity is the same as that of about six
PDs.

•

Huge capacity: RAID5 (8+P)

Consisting of nine PDs, the RANK Capacity is the same as that of about eight
PDs.

The LD Batch Binding refers to bind multiple logical disks in a batch in accordance with simple parameter instructions
such as the RAID type and the number of logical disks. The procedure and precautions for its execution are described
below.

To collectively bind logical disks, selecting all physical disks, first unbind all configurations already made.
Therefore, please note that all the RANKs and logical disks that are already bound will be unbound.

(1) Execution procedure
The procedure for Batch Binding of logical disks is as follows. The screen transition is shown in Figure 8-21.
(i)

Select the disk array from the iSM client main screen and then start [Configuration] from the menu or from
the toolbar.

(ii) Click [Setting] from the “Select Operation Mode” dialog.
(iii) Click the [LD Bind] button on “Configuration- [Setting Mode]” to display the LD Batch Binding screen.
(For details of the LD Batch Binding screen, refer to 8.2.4 (5) “LD Batch Binding screen”.)
(iv) Set the necessary item on the LD Batch Binding screen and then click the [OK] button to output the LD
Batch Binding Confirmation screen.

(For details of display items, refer to 8.2.4 (6) “Confirm LD Batch

Binding screen”.)

IV-121

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

(v)

If there is no problem with the value to bind, click the [Yes] button.

LD Batch Binding will start.

Select Operation Mode Screen

Configuration-[Setting Mode] Screen

LD Batch Binding Screen

LD Batch Binding Confirmation Screen

Figure 8-21

Transition of LD Batch Binding Screens

IV-122

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

(2) Execution conditions
When batch binding logical disks for all the physical disks, all the existing settings are unset.

Therefore, if any

one of the following conditions is met, the batch binding cannot be executed.
(i)

Logical disks managed by the Access Control (Port mode) are present.

(ii) Logical disks managed by the Access Control (WWN mode) are present.
(iii) Logical disks that are set in pairs are present.
Execute the batch binding after unset the states above.

(3) Disk relationship
When binding logical disks, it is necessary to understand the relationship between the physical disk, the RANK,
and the logical disk.
Figure 8-22 shows the relationship between the physical disk, the RANK, and the logical disk.
Physical Disks (PDs)

The unit of physical disks comprising a
RAID is called RANK. The capacity of a
RANK is not a simple total of physical disk
capacities but varies with the RAID type.

RANK
Logical disks are bound in the RANK.
Multiple logical disks can be created in a
single RANK.
Logical Disks (LDs)

Figure 8-22

Disk Relationship Diagram

(4) Complement
In the batch binding, it is executed from RANK Bind to LD Bind all at once.

In this case, both the RANK and

the LD are bound with the same capacity. Regarding the RANK binding, four patterns based on the
combinations of the PD count and the RAID type can be specified.

However, when binding through other

settings, refer to 8.2 “Method of Binding Logical Disks”.
The screen displayed when binding logical disks in a batch and the details are described below.

IV-123

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

(5) LD Batch Binding screen
The LD Batch Binding screen is shown in Figure 8-23.

The displays and setting items in the screen are

described below.

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)

(E)

(F)

(G)

Figure 8-23
(A)

LD Batch Binding Screen

PD Group Number
The PD group of LD Batch Binding is specified here. The PD groups existing in the disk array are displayed in
the pull-down list.

Select one from the list.

The PD group refers to a management aggregate of PDs; therefore, it is impossible to form a configuration
spanning two or more PD groups.
(B)

Binding logical disks shall be set within this PD group.

Physical Target Disk
Select batch binding target physical disks.
• All the PD
Batch binds all physical disks that exist in the specified PD group.
have already been bound, and newly binds them.

IV-124

Unbinds all the spares and RANKs which

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

• Unused PD
Binds physical disks which have not configured the spare and RANK in the specified PD group. Does not
unbind spares and RANKs which have already been bound.
(C)

RANK Information
The number of RANKs to bind is displayed.
The number of displays is automatically calculated depending on the disk array setting state as well as the set
values of spares and LDs.

(D)

Setting Spare
Specifies the number of spares. The set value up to twice as many as the DE count can be specified.
the maximum value varies with the number of spare binding target physical disks.
is 2, the specifiable range is 0 to 4 and the initial value is 2.

However,

For example, if the DE count

Since there are up to 8 spares per PD group, the

upper limit of the set value is 8 when the DE count is 4 or more.

Up to two spares can be created for a disk enclosure (DE).
DEs are physical components of the disk array on which physical disks are mounted.
When binding unused physical disks, the maximum value varies with the number of spares that have already been
bound.

(E)

Setting RANK
Specifies the RAID type of the RANK to bind. This setup and the PD capacity determine the RANK capacity.
• High Reliability RAID1 (1+1):

Consisting of two PDs, the RANK capacity is equivalent to that of about
one PD.

• Standard RAID5 (4+P):

Consisting of five PDs, the RANK capacity is equivalent to that of about
four PDs.

• Large Capacity RAID5 (6+P):

Consisting of seven PDs, the RANK capacity is the same as that of about
six PDs.

• Huge Capacity RAID5 (8+P):

Consisting of nine PDs, the RANK capacity is the same as that of about
eight PDs.

Initial setting is set as “Standard RAID5 (4+P)”.

IV-125

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

(F)

Setting LD
Specifies the number of LDs to bind or their capacity (or both).
• Only specify the number of LDs
The maximum capacity that can be created is automatically calculated for the individual LD Capacity. Since,
in this case, the number of LDs to bind in a RANK is specified, the number of actually bound LDs is the
specified value multiplied by the RANK count.
• Only specify LD capacity
The maximum number that can be created is automatically calculated for the number of LDs to be bound in the
RANK.

Information such as the number of LDs that are finally bound and their capacity can be checked with

8.2.4 (6) “Confirm LD Batch Binding screen” after clicking the [OK] button.
• Specify both the number of LDs and LD capacity
Any value can be set to the number of logical disks/capacity. The acceptability of the set value is verified after
the [OK] button is clicked.

1.

If the set value is in error, an error message is output.

The capacity which is entered into the input field can be used by the user.

However, depending on the input

value and the RAID configuration, a capacity exceeding this value may be obtained.

The reason is that, since

the minimum unit that can be bound in the case of RAID5(n+P) is 128KBxn, disks are bound in terms of
rounded-up MBs if the resulting figure cannot be divided.

As the area for use in the RANK, there is not only

the capacity for use by the user but also the disk management area.
2.

The maximum number of LDs which can be bound in the same RANK is 36.

(G)

Setting LD Type/Name
For the LDs to bind, it is possible to set their formats and names simultaneously with their binding.
name needs to be unique in the system (no two names must not be the same).

The LD

Therefore, when binding multiple

LDs, the LD names in which the sequential numbers are added to the specified character strings are automatically
given.
The value initially displayed in the LD name input field is 20 characters which result from adding 4 characters of
the logical disk number to 16 characters inherent to the disk array.

When the logical disk name is not changed,

the above-mentioned initial value is set.
When the LD type is not changed, the LD Type is made blank.
Example: 0200200000004C518CAC0000, 200000004C518CAC0001, …
Moreover, when the LD Type is made blank, the value set before shipment is initially displayed. The LD Type
is made blank, and “16 characters inherent to the disk array + 4 characters of the logical disk number” is set for

IV-126

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

the LD name.
A list of selectable LD Type is shown in Table 8-2.
The LD Type and LD name can be changed later on the main screen of the iSM client or in 7.2.4 “Renaming a
Logical Disk”.
Table 8-2
LD Type

1.

List of LD Type
Description

A2

Operating LDs by the ACOS-2 system

A4

Operating LDs by the ACOS-4 system
(If you are setting this type, ask our maintenance personnel.)

AX

Operating LDs by the AIX system

CX

Operating LDs by the Solaris system

LX

Operating LDs by the Linux system

NX

Operating LDs by the HP-UX system

WN

Operating LDs by the Windows system

LD name which do not abide by the following regulations cannot be set.
• Number of available characters:

1 to 24 characters

• Available characters:

Alphabet:

A to Z (a to z)
* Upper- and lower-case characters are distinguished.

Numerals:

0 to 9

Underbar:

-

Slash:

/

* All the characters must be 1-byte characters.
2.

If this set value is in error, the same LD name as when this setting is omitted is given.

3.

On the ACOS-4 system, make sure that the LD name matches the LD identifier name on the host.

For information on the “A4” format, refer to Appendix G “ACOS-4 Resource Operation Guard”.

IV-127

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

(6) Confirm LD Batch Binding screen
Click the [OK] button after entering the required parameters into the LD Batch Bind screen described in (5) to
display the confirmation screen shown in Figure 8-24.
If there are no problems with the setting information on batch binding, click [Yes]. The RANK and LD binding
will start.

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)

Figure 8-24
(A)

Confirm LD Batch Binding Screen

Information About PD
y PD Group Number:

PD group number to bind

y Number of Spares:

(total) Number of spares to bind

y Number of Unused PDs: Number of PDs unused for binding
For batch binding, the number of PDs for RANK Bind is any of 2, 5, 7, and 9.

Therefore, depending on

specifying the physical configuration and “Setting RANK”, “Unused PD” may be present.

IV-128

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

Example: In the event of a single DE with 15 PDs in the DE, these values are as shown in the table below.
Table 8-3

(B)

Number of Unused PDs

RANK Setting

Number of Spares

Number of Created RANKs Number of Unused PDs

High Reliability RAID1 (1+1)

1

7

0

Standard

RAID5 (4+P)

1

2

4

Standard

RAID5 (4+P)

2

2

3

Information About RANK
y RANK Type:

y Number of RANKs:

RAID type and the number of PDs which bind the RANK
High reliability

RAID1 (1+1):

Mirroring configuration based on two PDs

Standard

RAID5 (4+P):

Striping configuration based on five PDs

Large capacity

RAID5 (6+P):

Striping configuration based on seven PDs

Huge capacity

RAID5 (8+P):

Striping configuration based on nine PDs

Number of RANKs to bind

y Total RANK Capacity: Total capacity of RANKs to bind
y Total Unused RANK Capacity:

Capacity of the free space for LD Binding in the RANK to bind. If the LD
Capacity is automatically calculated, it is basically 0 here.

(C)

Information About LD
y LD Capacity:

Capacity of a single LD to bind

y Total Number of LDs:

Total number of LDs to bind
Not the number of LDs per RANK but the total number of LDs to bind

y Total LD Capacity:

Total capacity of all the LDs to bind
LD Capacity × Total Number of LDs = Total LD Capacity

(D)

Information About LD Ownership
The ownership of the LDs to bind is displayed. Fixed to controller 0.

The Ownership is valid only when Cross Call is OFF.

To set the LD Ownership to controller 1 when Cross Call is

ON, use “Change Ownership” after binding or specify the controller on “Individual Bind of LD” and perform
binding.

IV-129

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

(7) Result screen
When LD Batch Binding is completed successfully, a message box as shown below appears.

Figure 8-25

Success Message Box

“Bind” here means that LD binding started successfully. Check the LD state for information by using the main
screen of the iSM client to see if the actual binding is completed or not.
Immediately after the binding is started, “Attn.(formatting)” appears as shown in Figure 8-26.

Figure 8-26

LD Formatting Screen

Even during LD formatting, it is possible to unbind LDs.

Therefore, even after LD Batch Binding can be

performed again without waiting for completion of an error binding.

The LD Format Time is set to 0 hours.

To change this format time, use “Change Format Time” on 8.2.3 “Setting

Logical Disk Bind Time”.

IV-130

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

When LD Batch Binding fails, a message box appears as shown below.

Figure 8-27

Failure Message Box

Possible causes of an LD batch binding failure may be a communication error between the iSM server and the
iSM client, a problem in the disk array, and so forth.

When there is a communication error, the binding

instruction may have been correct; therefore, reconnect the iSM client and check the state.
error, the failure factor is recorded in the application log of the iSM server.

If the disk array is in

In this case, take appropriate

measures while referring to the application log of the iSM server and then re-execute the binding.

IV-131

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..33 B
Biin
nd
diin
ng
g aa S
Sp
paarree
To bind spares, refer to the following descriptions.
Spare Bind (8.3.1)
Spare Unbind (8.3.2)
Spare Rebuilding Mode (8.3.3)

Figure 8-28 RANK/Spare Tab Screen Menu and Buttons

IV-132

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..33..11 S
Sppaarree B
Biinndd
On the RANK/Spare Tab screen (Figure 8-28), spare can be bound/unbound by using the popup menu (right-click) or
the buttons on the screen after selecting PDs and RANKs, etc.
Selecting only a single unused PD enables this button, thus making it possible to bind a spare.

Button Enabled

Select Only a Single Unused Disk.

Figure 8-29

Spare Bind

Click the [Spare Bind] button to display a message as follows.

Figure 8-30

Spare Bind Confirmation

Select [Yes] to bind a spare.

IV-133

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..33..22 S
Sppaarree U
Unnbbiinndd
Select Spare on the RANK/Spare Tab screen (Figure 8-28) to enable [Spare Unbind].

Button Enabled

Spare Selected

Figure 8-31

Spare Unbind

Click the [Spare Unbind] button to display a message as shown below.

Figure 8-32

Spare Unbind Confirmation

Select [Yes] to unbind the spare.

IV-134

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..33..33 S
Sppaarree R
Reebbuuiillddiinngg M
Mooddee
(1) Special screen
The screen shown below (Configuration setting menu → Setting Disk Array → Special) can be used to set the
spare rebuilding mode.
You can also make various settings by activating each checkbox (such as Cross Call, Spare, and Expand LUN) to
enable them and then clicking the [Apply] button at lower right. Moreover, immediately after the screen has
been displayed or after the setting has been made, current settings for the disk array are activated through radio
buttons.
For S400/S1400/S2400/S2800 disk array, refer to Figure 8-34.

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)
(E)

Figure 8-33

Special Screen

IV-135

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

(D)

(E)

Figure 8-34
(A)

Special Screen (S400/S1400/S2400/S2800)

Cross Call
Refer to 8.5.1 "Cross Call and Auto Assignment".

(B)

Spare
Can set the data rebuild operation when one of the physical disks configuring logical disks fails.
y Auto Repair:

The repair operation is automatically started when unused spare disks exist.

y Manually Repair:

Placed in the rebuild wait state without automatically performing repair operations.

When placed in the rebuild wait state, the repair start instruction can be given on the RANK/Spare Screen.
(C)

Expand LUN

Refer to 0 "
Expand LUN".
(D)

Change Time
Refer to 9.5 "Setting Disk Array Time".

(E)

Get Log
Refer to 9.6 "Getting Log in the Disk Array".

IV-136

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

Even when Manually Repair is set during repair operation, the repair operation is not stopped.

The setting applies

only from the next repair operation.
Even when Auto Repair is set in the rebuild wait state, the repair operation does not start.
from the next repair operation.

IV-137

The setting applies only

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..44 S
Seettttiin
ng
g tth
hee P
Po
orrtt
88..44..11 E
Exxppaanndd LLU
UN
N
When connecting to HP-UX, it is possible to expand the number of logical disks which can be detected from the OS in
terms of each port.
Select the Port Number from the pull-down menu on the Special screen in Figure 8-33 and then select ON or OFF from
the radio button located below to be able to set them by clicking the [Apply] button at lower right.
The Port Number is represented in terms of the “directory number - port number”.

As a result of changing this setting, the disk array may stop being accessible from OS. Careful attention needs to be
directed in changing the setting. For details, refer to the disk array user’s manual.

IV-138

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..55 S
Sp
peecciiaall S
Seettttiin
ng
gss
To make special settings, refer to the following descriptions.
Cross Call and Auto Assignment (8.5.1)
Ownership (8.5.2)

Figure 8-35

When Selecting the [Special] Tab on the Setting Disk Array Screen

IV-139

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..55..11 C
Crroossss C
Caallll aanndd A
Auuttoo A
Assssiiggnnm
meenntt
Can set Cross Call function ON/OFF.
y Cross Call ON state
This can be set when two controllers exist. In this state, all the logical disks can be accessed from the two
controllers.

The Auto Assignment function is disabled.

y Cross Call OFF state
Refers to the disk array’s initial state.

The logical disk can be accessed only from the controller which has the

Ownership.
In this case, it becomes possible to set the Auto Assignment function.
y Auto Assignment function
Enabled when two controllers are available.

The purpose of this function is automatically switching to the access

to another controller when the primary controller goes down.

When the Cross Call is set to OFF, there may exist logical disks which can no longer be accessible from OS,
according to the Ownership and the connected controller. In this case, please change the Ownership.

IV-140

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..55..22 O
Ow
wnneerrsshhiipp
On the LD Individual Bind/Unbind screen (Figure 8-14), LD binding/unbinding can be performed.

The operation can

be performed by using the popup menu (right-click) or the buttons on the screen after selecting a logical disk or free
space of RANK.
Changes the LD Ownership.
When a logical disk exists in the selected PD group, clicking this button displays the dialog shown in the figure below,
making it possible to change the ownership.
When selecting multiple logical disks, perform operation as described below.
Select continuous logical disks:

Select the first and the last logical disks while holding down the Shift key.

Select an Individual logical disk:

Select a logical disk while holding down the Ctrl key.

Figure 8-36

Change Ownership Dialog

IV-141

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

The display order of the numbers and logical disk names in the list can be changed. For information on the
settings, refer to “Client Start/Stop” in the “User’s Manual” or “User’s Manual (UNIX)” in accordance with the OS
in use.

IV-142

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..66 E
Exxp
pllaan
naattiio
on
no
off C
Co
on
nffiig
gu
urraattiio
on
nS
Seettttiin
ng
g
S
Sccrreeeen
n
Bind or unbind LDs or RANKs individually in accordance with the following procedure.
On S400/S1400/S2400/S2800 disk array, refer to 7.4 “Explanation of Configuration Setting Screen”.
(1) Click “LD Bind/Unbind” from the “Configuration- [Setting Mode]” screen.
(2) RANK Binding or settings related to Spare disks are performed by selecting “RANK/Spare” with a tab (refer to
8.6.1 “RANK/Spare Screen” for details).
(3) Settings for LD bind/unbind are performed by selecting “LD” with a tab (refer to 8.6.2 “Logical Disk Screen” for
details).

When binding logical disks having the same capacity as an already bound logical disk for such a purpose as
replication, refer to Appendix D “Notes on Use for Data Replication”.

IV-143

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..66..11 R
RA
AN
NK
K//S
Sppaarree S
Sccrreeeenn
(1) Description
The RANK/Spare screen, which is shown in Figure 8-37, describes the content based on its encircled numbers.
Refer to (2) “Operation” to know how to operate the screen.

(A)

(C)

(B)

(D)

(E)

(A)

Figure 8-37

RANK/Spare Screen

PD Group Number
The PD group for performing the RANK/Spare Bind/Unbind is specified here. The PD groups existing in the
disk array are displayed in the pull-down list; select one from among them.
The PD group refers to a management aggregate of PDs; therefore, it is impossible to form a configuration
spanning two or more PD groups.

RANK/Spare Bind/Unbind shall be set within this PD group.

IV-144

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

(B)

PD window
PDs existing in the selected PD group are displayed in terms of each DE.

For details of the display, refer to the

diagram below.
PD Number

DE Number

Used PDs
Figure 8-38

(C)

Unused PDs

PD Window

RANK window
RANKs bound within the PD group are displayed.
For details of the display, refer to the diagram below.

Total Number of RANK in
PD Group

Physical Disks
Configuring RANK

RANK Number

Figure 8-39 RANK Window
(D)

Spare window
Spare disks bound within the selected PD group are displayed.
For details of the display, refer to the diagram below.

Spare Disk Number
Figure 8-40

Spare Window

IV-145

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

(E)

Shape of selected button
PDs and RANKs are displayed with button shapes.
buttons.

Select/Deselect are performed by clicking the relevant

The selected state has the concave shape, whereas the deselected state is the convex shape.

alternated by clicking the left button of the mouse.

These are

Clicking again on what is already selected will change it to

Deselect (or vice versa).
The states of RANKs and unused PDs are as follows.
* Select an unused PD when a RANK is already selected. → Both the RANK and the unused PD are placed in the
selected state.

Figure 8-41

RANKs and Unused PDs

* Select another unused PD when an unused PD is already selected. → Multiple unused PDs are placed in the
selected state.

Figure 8-42

Multiple Unused PDs

IV-146

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

(2) Operation
In this dialog, RANK Bind/unbind can be performed by using the popup menu of the right button or the buttons
on the screen after selecting PDs and RANKs, etc.

The encircled alphabets on the screen are described.

(A)
(B)

(C)
Popup Menu
Figure 8-43 RANK/Spare Tab Screen Menu and Buttons
(A)

Unselect
Deselects the selected RANKs, unused PDs or Spares.

IV-147

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

(B)

Properties
The properties of selected RANKs, unused PDs and Spares are displayed as shown below.

Figure 8-44 RANK/PD/Spare Properties
(C)

[Get Disk Array Info.]
This button is used to read the current values which are set in the disk array. In the event of communication
errors or some changes in the disk array, this button can be used to update the information.

IV-148

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

88..66..22 LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk S
Sccrreeeenn
(1) Description
The LD screen is shown in Figure 8-45. The encircled alphabets in the screen are described below.

To know

how to manipulate the screen, refer to (2) “Operation”.

(A)

(B)

Figure 8-45
(A)

LD Screen

PD Group Number
The PD group for performing the LD bind/unbind is specified here. The PD groups existing in the disk array are
displayed in the pull-down list; select one from among them.
The PD group refers to a management aggregate of PDs; therefore, it is impossible to form a configuration
spanning two or more PD groups.

LD bind/unbind shall be set within this PD group.

IV-149

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

(B)

LD window
RANKs existing in the selected PD group and the LDs bound in the RANK are displayed.

For details of the

display, refer to the diagram below.

Logical Disks

RANK Number

Unused Area in RANK

RANK Capacity
Physical Disks

RANK’s RAID Type

Configuring RANK

LD Number
LD Name

LD Capacity

Multiple RANKs

RANK Partition Capacity

Because LDs are spanning two or more PD groups, if any one of those is selected,
the RANK partitions which configure the LDs are simultaneously selected.

Figure 8-46 LD Window
Selecting a logical disk and then displaying the properties will result in outputting the detailed information.
details of the display, refer to (A) “Properties” of (2) “Operation”.

IV-150

For

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

(2) Operation
In this dialog, LD binding/unbinding can be performed. The operation can be performed by using the popup
menu (right-click) or the buttons on the screen after selecting a logical disk or free space of RANK.

The

encircled alphabets in the screen are described below.

(A)

Popup Menu

(B)
Figure 8-47

LD Individual Bind/Unbind

IV-151

Chapter 8 Disk Array Configuration Setting (S100/S1100/S1200/S1300/S2100/S2200/S2300)

(A)

Properties
Select a logical disk to display its properties.

Figure 8-48
(B)

A dialog box as shown below will appear.

LD Properties

[Get Disk Array Info.]
This button is used to read the current values which are set in the disk array. In the event of communication
errors or some changes in the disk array, this button can be used to update the information.

IV-152

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All
Units)
This chapter describes configuration settings common to all units.

99..11 N
Niicckkn
naam
mee S
Seettttiin
ng
g
In this section, nicknames are given and settings affecting the entire disk array, etc. Can be performed with regard to
the disk array.
The Nickname screen appears by clicking the [Setting Disk Array] button of the “Configuration - [Setting Mode]”
screen. (The disk array name, port name, and logical disk name can also be changed on the main screen of the iSM
client though this section describes the method using the configuration setting screen.

For the method using the main

screen, refer to the "User's Manual" or "User's Manual (UNIX)".)
The screen contains five tabs, [Nickname], [Platform], [Network], [License], and [Special].

This section describes

usage of the [Nickname] tab.
Note that some tabs may not be displayed because the support function varies depending on the disk array series. For
information on differences in supported functions between the disk array series products, refer to 6.1 “Parameters”.

IV-153

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

99..11..11 S
Seettttiinngg aa D
Diisskk A
Arrrraayy N
Naam
mee
(1) Nickname screen
The screen below (Configuration setting menu → Setting Disk Array → Nickname) can change the disk array
name and the port name.

(A)

(B)

(C)

Figure 9-1
(A)

(B)

(C)

Nickname Screen

Disk Array Subsystem Information
Product ID:

The disk array’s product ID is displayed.

Serial Number:

The disk array serial number is displayed.

Setting Disk Array Name
Disk Array Name:

The current disk array name is displayed.

New Disk Array Name:

Refers to the field for entering the disk array name to change.

Setting Port Name
Refer to 9.1.2 "Setting a Port Name".

IV-154

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

Enter a new name into the [New Disk Array Name] and then click the [Apply] button to output a message as
shown below to change the disk array name.

Figure 9-2

Setting Disk Array Name Success Screen

Unless the disk array name and the port name to enter abide by the rules below, settings cannot be made.
Number of available characters: 1 to 32 characters
Available characters:

Alphabet:

A to Z (a to z)
* Upper- and lower-case characters are distinguished.

Numerals:

0 to 9

Underbar:

_

Slash:

/

* All the characters must be 1-byte characters.

IV-155

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

99..11..22 S
Seettttiinngg aa P
Poorrtt N
Naam
mee
(1) Nickname screen
The Nickname screen, which is as shown below, can change the disk array name and the port name.

(A)

(B)

(C)

Figure 9-3
(A)

Nickname Screen

Disk Array Subsystem Information
Refer to 9.1.1 "Setting a Disk Array Name".

(B)

Setting Disk Array Name
Refer to 9.1.1 "Setting a Disk Array Name".

(C)

Setting Port Name
Port Number:

The port existing in the disk array is output to the pull-down menu.

Only the port for the

host can have a name specified. The port number list shows only the port number of the
port for the host subordinate to Host Director.
The displayed format is the “director number - port number (port name)”.
Port Name

Displays the current port name of the port selected for “Port Number”.

New Port Name

Refers to the field for entering the port name to change.

IV-156

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

Enter a new name and then click the [Apply] button with regard to the port selected from the Port Number to
output a message as shown below to change the port name.

Figure 9-4

Setting Port Name Success Screen

Unless the disk array name and the port name to enter abide by the rules below, settings cannot be made.
Number of available characters: 1 to 32 characters
Available characters:

Alphabet:

A to Z (a to z)
* Upper- and lower-case characters are distinguished.

Numerals:

0 to 9

Underbar:

_

Slash:

/

* All the characters must be 1-byte characters.

99..11..33 R
Reennaam
miinngg aa P
Pooooll
The pool can be renamed on the "LD Individual Bind/Unbind" screen.

Refer to 7.1.4 "Renaming a Pool".

99..11..44 R
Reennaam
miinngg aa LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk
The logical disk can be renamed on the "LD Individual Bind/Unbind" screen.
Disk".

IV-157

Refer to 7.2.4 "Renaming a Logical

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

99..11..55 N
Niicckknnaam
mee B
Baattcchh S
Seettttiinngg
Nickname Batch Setting refers to name batch setting (disk array name, port name, LD type/name) based on the
definition file.

(1) Execution procedure
Perform the name batch setting (disk array name, port name, LD type/name) based on the definition file in
accordance with the following procedure.
(A) Click the [Setting Nickname] button from the “Configuration- [Setting Mode]” to display the Nickname
Batch Setting dialog.
(B) When making settings based on the user definition file, select [Read from text file] and then select any file
from the dialog that opens up to read files.

For information on formatting the user definition file for batch

setting, refer to (a) “Formatting the user definition file”. The settings can be made without reading the user
definition file, by entering them directly in the edit box.
the file format description example.

In that case, enter the settings in accordance with

Note that each line of such a description must begin with a “,”.

(C) After file reading, the data that has been read appears in the edit box.

Modification, if necessary, can be

made on this screen.
The format which appears in the edit box comes with “,” at the head of the file records that are read.

Make

sure to keep this because it is used as the state area for storing individual set results to be described later.
(D) If the check box for [Execute From Cursor Line] is activated, execute the setting from the cursor line in the
edit box.

Nickname Batch Setting is executed from the key information of the disk array which comes after the cursor line.
The lines above the key information of the disk array cannot identify the disk array and are therefore not executed.

(E) After content verification, click [Set disk array].
(F)

Individual set results (see below) are displayed in the state area. If in error, take measures appropriate to
the displayed content.
success:

Execution results are normal.

success (already):

Execution results are normal (Already set to the same name)

failure (invalid):

Parameter error

failure (i/o error):

Access error

failure (same name):

The same name exists.

failure (RPL pair):

Format change of LDs for which replication pairs are set

IV-158

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

failure (busy):

Executing other processing

failure (communication): Communication error
failure (protected):

ACOS-4 resource protection error

failure (SDV):

Format setting of a snapshot data volume

failure (BV/SV/LV):

Format change of BV, SV, or LV

failure (RPL Port):

Setting of the replication port

failure (nnh):

Other error(s) (nn: Internal error code)

If “failure (communication)” or “failure (nnh)” is displayed in the batch setting process, error may have been
detected after I/O to/from the disk array is ended.

Check the iSM client’s main screen to see if settings have been

made for the disk array or not.

(1) For information on the ACOS-4 resource protection error, refer to Appendix G “ACOS-4 Resource Operation
Guard”.
(2) SDV, BV, SV, and LV are volumes used for snapshots.

For information about these volumes, refer to the

“Snapshot User's Manual (Function Guide)” (IS030).

(G) By clicking the [Extract Error Line] button after completing the process, only the settings in error are
extracted in the edit box.
(H) In the event of saving the definition file, select [Save As] from the dialog and then save it by specifying any
file name from the save dialog.
Output to a file can be made except the state area at the head of the record

IV-159

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

Figure 9-5

Nickname Batch Setting Dialog

IV-160

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

99..22 P
Pllaattffo
orrm
m
The screen shown below (Configuration setting menu → Setting Disk Array → Platform) can be used to change the
platform settings of the port.

Figure 9-6

Setting Disk Array Dialog Box (With [Platform] Tab)

IV-161

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

(1) Platform screen
The “Platform” pull-down menu displays a list of platforms that can be set for the disk array.
If a platform, which cannot be set for the target disk array, is specified, the system displays the following message
and prompts you to enter a registered platform.

Figure 9-7

Message for Specification of Unsupported Platform

The initial value of the “Platform” pull-down menu is blank.

If the [Apply] button is clicked in blank state, the

system displays the following message and prompts you to specify a platform.

Figure 9-8

Message for No Specification of Platform

Up to two characters can be entered for the “Platform” pull-down menu.

IV-162

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

99..33 N
Neettw
wo
orrkk
The screen shown below (Configuration setting menu → Setting Disk Array → Network) can be used to make various
network settings

(4)

(1)

(2)

(3)

Figure 9-9

Setting Disk Array Dialog Box ([Network] Tab)

The warning dialog box in Figure 9-10 appears when the [Apply] button is clicked after the current IP Address is
changed.

Figure 9-10

Warning Dialog Box

The setting change confirmation dialog box in Figure 9-11 appears when the [Apply] button is clicked without the
current IP Address being changed in the dialog box in Figure 9-9 or when the [OK] button is clicked in the warning

IV-163

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

dialog box in Figure 9-10.

Figure 9-11

Setting Change Confirmation Dialog Box

Be careful that if the network setting of a disk array is changed incorrectly, the disk array becomes invisible from
iSM.
After making a change of an IP address unused for a control path, you need to modify (re-set) the settings according
to the change by using Environment Settings on the iSM server.

(1)

Set up Disk Array TCP/IP Information
Specify the IP (Internet Protocol) of the disk array. The current value is displayed before the IP Address is
changed.

(2)

Set up SCSI Socket
Specify the iSM server that monitors the target disk array through the Ether path.

Figure 9-12 Set up SCSI Socket Screen

IV-164

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

y Accept SCSI Socket packets from any IP Address
The target disk array can be monitored by any of the iSM servers connected on the network on which the disk
array is connected.
y Accept SCSI Socket packets from these IP Address
The target disk array can be monitored by only the IP-address-registered one of the iSM servers connected on
the network on which the disk array is connected.
To specify the IP Address of an iSM server, click the [Add] button.

The Add IP Address screen in Figure 9-13

appears.

Figure 9-13

IP Address Addition Screen

To edit an IP Address, select the IP Address of an added iSM server from the list on the “Set up SCSI Socket
Screen”, and click the [Edit] button.

The Edit IP Address screen in Figure 9-14 appears.

Figure 9-14

IP Address Edit Screen

To delete an IP Address, select the IP Address of an added iSM server from the list on the “Set up SCSI Socket
Screen”, and click the [Delete] button.

IV-165

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

(3)

Set up SNMP
Set the SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) information of the disk array.

Figure 9-15

Set up SNMP Screen

y Community Name
Specify a community name with up to 62 characters (ASCII characters).
y Trap Information button
“Trap Information screen (Figure 9-16)” appears.

Register trap information on the screen. Enter each trap

information item with up to 79 characters (ASCII characters).
y Trap Transmission Place
The system sends trap information to the registered IP Address.
y Accept SNMP packets from any IP Address
The system accepts SNMP requests from all hosts having requests.

IV-166

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

y Accept SNMP packets from these IP Address
The system accepts SNMP requests from the registered IP Address.

Figure 9-16

Trap Information Screen

Trap Sense Interval:

Set an interval at which the disk array monitors the causes of traps.

Unit Contact:

Enter administrator’s information such as the disk array’s administrator, management
department, or where to contact.

Unit Name:

Enter the disk array name or the name of the host to be used.

Unit Location:

Enter the location where the disk array is installed.

Unit Info:

Enter other information necessary for management.

For the S100/S1200/S1300/S2200/S2300 disk array, set the following values with up to 40 characters.
y Community Name
y Unit Contact
y Unit Name
y Unit Location
y Unit Info

IV-167

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

(4)

Copy the network setup information
If the disk array contains more than one Service Processor, the network settings of a Service Processor can be
copied into a selected Service Processor.

Figure 9-17

Copy Screen

IV-168

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

99..44 L
Liicceen
nssee
The screen below is provided to unlock the license of a purchased product.

Figure 9-18

Setting Disk Array Dialog Box (License)

Enter the license key, which is provided with the purchased product, with 30 characters (6-6-6-6-6) in half size, and
click the [Unlock] button.
The contents of the product of which license is to be unlocked are displayed.

Figure 9-19

Product Contents Confirmation Screen

Click the [Yes] button to unlock the license.
If the license has been unlocked, the message in Figure 9-20 is displayed.

IV-169

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

Figure 9-20

Message Indicating that the License Has Already Unlocked

If the license for DynamicDataReplication is unlocked for the first time in the 2000 series disk array (not including
S2400), the disk array needs to be restarted.

Figure 9-21

If it is upgraded, the disk array does not need to be restarted.

Disk Array Restart Message

IV-170

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

99..55 S
Seettttiin
ng
gD
Diisskk A
Arrrraayy T
Tiim
mee
(1) Special screen
The screen shown below (Configuration setting menu → Setting Disk Array → Special) can be used to set the
disk array time.
You can also make various settings by activating each checkbox (such as Cross Call, Spare, and Expand LUN) to
enable them and then clicking the [Apply] button at lower right. Moreover, immediately after the screen has
been displayed or after the setting has been made, current settings for the disk array are activated through radio
buttons.
For S400/S1400/S2400/S2800, refer to Figure 9-23.

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)
(E)

Figure 9-22

Special Screen

IV-171

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

(D)

(E)

Figure 9-23
(A)

Special Screen (S400/S1400/S2400/S2800)

Cross Call
Refer to 8.5.1 "Cross Call and Auto Assignment".

(B)

Spare
Refer to 8.3.3 "Spare Rebuilding Mode".

(C)

Expand LUN

Refer to 0 "
Expand LUN".
(D)

Change Time
Can change the disk array time.
If “Set the Date and Time of Disk Array Subsystem according to server Date&Time of Server” is selected, the
date/time of the iSM server monitoring the disk array is set.

When “Set the Date and Time of Disk Array

Subsystem manually” is activated, the disk array date can be changed to arbitrary date.

However, this is not

possible for automatic setting.
Moreover, for the information on Auto/Manual setting change, refer to the “User's Manual” or “User’s Manual
(UNIX)” in accordance with your OS.

IV-172

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

(E)

Get Log
Refer to 9.6 "Getting Log in the Disk Array".

Figure 9-24

Change Disk Array Time Dialog

IV-173

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

99..66 G
Geettttiin
ng
gL
Lo
og
g iin
n tth
hee D
Diisskk A
Arrrraayy
Outputs the internal log data in the disk array to any file.
Click this button to output the check message as shown below.

Figure 9-25

Internal Log Data Output Check Message

Here, click the [OK] button to display the output destination Save As dialog as shown below.
Specify any file name and then click the [Save] button to start saving file.

Figure 9-26

Save As Dialog

IV-174

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

99..77 G
Geettttiin
ng
gC
Co
on
nffiig
gu
urraattiio
on
n IIn
nffo
orrm
maattiio
on
n
The configuration information can be acquired in either text or CSV format.

99..77..11 G
Geettttiinngg C
Coonnffiigguurraattiioonn IInnffoorrm
maattiioonn iinn TTeexxtt
FFoorrm
maatt
Acquire the configuration information in text format.

To acquire the configuration information in text format, follow

the procedure described below.

(1) Operation
Clicking [Get Configuration Setting Info.] button in the Configuration [Setting Mode] menu (Figure 8-21)
displays the get configuration information confirmation dialog.

Figure 9-27

Get Configuration Information Confirmation Dialog

Clicking the [Yes] button in the get configuration information confirmation dialog displays the file format
selection dialog.

Figure 9-28

File Format Selection Dialog

Check that the [Text] radio button (default) is checked in the file format selection dialog, and click the [OK]
button. The save file confirmation dialog is displayed.

IV-175

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

Figure 9-29

Save File Confirmation Dialog

Specify a file name and click the [Save] button.
The configuration information is acquired from the disk array and saved in text format.

During the acquisition

of the configuration information, the following dialog is displayed.

Figure 9-30

Get Configuration Information Progress Dialog

When the information has been saved to the file, a message is displayed notifying you of the completion of the
acquisition of the configuration information.

Figure 9-31

Get Configuration Information Completion Message

IV-176

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

99..77..22 G
Geettttiinngg C
Coonnffiigguurraattiioonn IInnffoorrm
maattiioonn iinn C
CS
SV
V
FFoorrm
maatt
Acquire the configuration information in CSV format.

To acquire the configuration information in CSV format,

follow the procedure described below.

(1) Operation
Clicking [Get Configuration Setting Info.] button in the Configuration [Setting Mode] menu (Figure 8-21)
displays the get configuration information confirmation dialog (Figure 9-27).
Clicking the [Yes] button in the get configuration information confirmation dialog displays the file format
selection dialog (Figure 9-28).
Check the [CSV] radio button in the file format selection dialog, and click the [OK] button.

The Save As dialog

is displayed.

Figure 9-32

Save As Dialog

Specify the destination folder and click the [Save] button.
The default destination folder is the DATA folder immediately below the client installation folder. Because you
will get several files of CSV information, create a folder whose name indicates the date and time and save the
files immediately below that folder.
Example:

April 8, 2003, 8:00 p.m.
File name:

200304082000

To change the destination folder, click the [Browse] button and use the Browse for Folder dialog.

IV-177

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

Figure 9-33

Browse for Folder Dialog

When the [Save] button is clicked, the configuration information is acquired from the disk array and saved in
CSV format.

During the acquisition of the configuration information, a message dialog (Figure 9-30) is

displayed indicating that the configuration information is being acquired.
When the information has been saved to the file, a message is displayed notifying you of the completion of the
acquisition of the configuration information

Figure 9-34

Get Configuration Information Completion Message

IV-178

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

99..88 R
Reep
plliiccaattiio
on
nP
Paaiirr B
Baattcch
hS
Seettttiin
ng
g
Replication Batch Setting refers to setting replication, which is used for replications, collectively using the definition
file.

For information on the replication functions, refer to the “Data Replication User’s Manual (Function Guide)”.

(1) Execution procedure
When Replication Batch Setting, click the [Replication Setting] button from “Configuration- [Setting Mode]” to
display the Replication Batch Setting dialog.

An example of the Replication Batch Setting screen is shown in

Figure 9-35.

Figure 9-35

Example of Replication Batch Setting Screen

The screen above is operated in the same manner as described in 9.1.5 “Nickname Batch Setting”. However, the
detailed definitions of the file format and execution results are different.
For information on the file format, refer to Appendix F.2 “Pair Setting File”.

The execution results are listed

below.
success:

Successfully completed.

success(already):

Already set.

failure(already):

Failed, because the volume is already registered with another ATgroup.

failure(already RV):

Failed, because this is already paired with another MV as an RV.

failure(ATgroup invalid):

Failed, because the ATgroup name is invalid.

failure(ATgroup not exist):

Failed, because this ATgroup does not exist.

failure(ATgroup not separated):

Failed, because this ATgroup is not separated.

failure(ATgroup over):

Failed, because no more ATgroup can be defined.

IV-179

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

failure(DDR license locked):

Failed, because the DynamicDataReplication license is not canceled.

failure(DDR not supported):

Failed, because the DynamicDataReplication is not supported.

failure(Disk array not exist):

Failed, because the disk array does not exist.

failure(DR not supported):

Failed, because RemoteDataReplication/DisasterRecovery is not supported.

failure(DR license locked):

Failed, because the RemoteDataReplication/DisasterRecovery license is not
canceled.

failure(Freeze):

Failed, because the disk array is freezing.

failure(invalid):

Failed, because the description of the batch setup file is invalid.

failure(LINK path):

Failed, because all link paths between units are faulty.

failure(MV is dRV):

Failed in paring the DDR, because the MV is already the RV of the DDR.

failure(MV is freeze):

Failed, because the MV is freezing.

failure(MV is LV):

Failed, because the MV is classified as LV.

failure(MV is monitoring stop):

Failed, because the MV is monitoring stop.

failure(MV is reserved vol):

Failed, because the MV is a reserve group.

failure(MV is SDV):

Failed, because the MV is classified as SDV.

failure(MV is SV):

Failed, because the MV is classified as SV.

failure(MV not exist):

Failed, because the volume (MV) does not exist.

failure(MV not managed):

Failed, because the MV is not managed.

failure(MV not pair):

Failed, because the volume is not paired.

failure(MV not primary vol):

Failed, because the specified MV is not a PV (MV).

failure(MV not RDR):

Failed, because the specified MV is not RDR-paired.

failure(monitoring stop):

Failed, because the disk array is monitoring stop.

failure(not link):

Failed, because the disk arrays of the MV and RV are not linked.

failure(not separated):

Failed, because the status is not separated.

failure(not managed):

Failed, because the disk array is not managed.

failure(Pair loop):

Failed, because the pair layer will serve as a loop.

failure(Pair over):

Failed, because the MV cannot accept pair setting any more.

failure(RDR license locked):

Failed, because the RemoteDataReplication license is not canceled.

failure(RDR not supported):

Failed, because the RemoteDataReplication is not supported.

failure(RV is BV):

Failed, because the RV is classified as BV.

failure(RV is DDR MV):

Failed, because the RV is already the MV of the DDR.

failure(RV is freeze):

Failed, because the RV is freezing.

failure(RV is LV):

Failed, because the RV is classified as LV.

failure(RV is monitoring stop):

Failed, because the RV is monitoring stop.

failure(RV is reserved vol):

Failed, because the RV is a reserve group.

failure(RV is SDV):

Failed, because the RV is classified as SDV.

failure(RV is SV):

Failed, because the RV is classified as SV.

failure(RV not exist):

Failed, because the volume (RV) does not exist.

failure(RV registered ATgroup): Failed, because the RV is already registered with an ATgroup.
failure(several same ATgroups):

Failed, because there are multiple ATgroups.

failure(different diskarray(RV)): Failed, because the pair setting does not correspond to the RDR pair that is
already registered with the ATgroup.
failure(same name):

Failed, because the same ATgroup name already exists.

IV-180

Chapter 9 Configuration Setting (Common to All Units)

failure(Vol capacity unmatch):

Failed, because the volume capacity does not match.

failure(Vol not exist):

Failed, because the volume does not exist.

failure(Vol not pair):

Failed, because the pair is already forcibly deleted.

failure(Vol OS type unmatch):

Failed, because the volume format does not match.

failure(Vol to ATgroup over):

Failed, because no more volumes can be registered with the ATgroup.

failure(nnh):

Other error (nnh: Internal error code)

failure(several RDR pairs):

Failed, because the volumes registered with the ATgroup cannot accept new
disk array pair setting, or because a volume having multiple RDR pairs cannot
be registered with the ATgroup.

As a replication setting file, it is possible to use the file which is output by using the “Save the pair setup
information” function in “Replication Management”.

IV-181

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

Chapter 10

Access Control Operations

This chapter describes Access Control operations.

1100..11 C
Ch
haan
ng
giin
ng
g tth
hee P
Po
orrtt M
Mo
od
dee
Change the port mode on the following screen.

Figure 10-1

[Setting/Reference] Tab Screen

IV-182

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

(1) [Change Port Mode] button
Clicking this button will display the mode of each port of the disk array on the “Change Port Mode” dialog screen,
and change to the WWN mode and Port mode becomes possible.

If you want to change a port in Port mode,

which is already linked with an LD Set, into WWN mode, unlink the port from the LD Set and then change to the
WWN mode.
The port number indicates “Director Number - Port Number”.

Figure 10-2
[Mode Type]

Change Port Mode

Select a new port mode.
Ports cannot be changed from the WWN mode into Port mode in
AccessControl(WWN)-applied disk arrays.

(If the change is necessary, consult the

maintenance person about it.)

[Batch Changing]

y WWN Mode:

Changes the port into WWN mode.

y Port Mode:

Changes the port into Port mode.

Clicking this button sets all the ports into the mode selected in [Mode Type].
In this case, it is not necessary to select ports from the Port List.

[Change]

Select a target port and click the [Change] button. The selected port is set into the
mode selected in [Mode Type].

Multiple ports can be selected and set if the port list

screen shows the same mode for them.

In addition, a preliminary confirmation dialog

appears to confirm the previous port mode and new port mode.

IV-183

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

Figure 10-3

Preliminary Confirmation Dialog

The Change Port Mode operation immediately reflects on the Disk Array. Therefore, if settings are wrong, there is
a possibility that accessing from the business server to the LD may not be possible.
operation after checking the operation state.

It is necessary to perform

Furthermore, stop business or the business server according to the

necessity.

IV-184

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

1100..22 S
Seettttiin
ng
gL
LD
DS
Seettss
To set LD Sets, refer to the following descriptions.
Setting an LD Set (10.2.1)
Linking an LD Set and Path (10.2.2)
Changing the LD Set Name (10.2.3)
Deleting an LD Set (10.2.4)

Figure 10-4

[AccessControl] Tab Screen

IV-185

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

1100..22..11 S
Seettttiinngg aann LLD
DS
Seett
Clicking the [New] button on the AccessControl tab screen (Figure 10-4) will display the following dialog screen,
thereby a new LD Set can be created.

Figure 10-5

New LD Set

For LD Set, specify the platform of the business server that accesses a logical disk via the LD set.
A list of specifiable platforms is displayed.
The following platforms can be specified:
Table 10-1 Platforms
Platform

Description

A2

ACOS-2 system

AX

AIX system

CX

Solaris system

LX

Linux system

NX

HP-UX system

WN

Windows system

Furthermore, the LD Set name can be set by using arbitrary 16 characters including alphanumeric characters, “/” and
“_”.
However, when the combination of the Platform and the LD Set name have already been set to other LD Set, new
settings are not possible.

IV-186

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

Only a Platform and a name are set for a newly created LD Set. For the business server to recognize logical disks,
it is necessary to set actual path information through [Link Path] and also assign logical disks.
A single LD Set is linked with each business server.

Thus, the name of the business server to be connected to the

port of the disk array to be linked or the name of a business server having WWPN should be specified for the LD Set
name.

If the [New] operation fails, the error dialog screen showing the failure will be displayed.
When an operation request is in error, there is a possibility of inconsistency between the disk array setting information
and the information administrated on the iSM client. Therefore, click [Get Disk Array Info.].

IV-187

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

1100..22..22 LLiinnkkiinngg aann LLD
DS
Seett aanndd P
Paatthh
Selecting an LD Set and clicking the [Link Path] button on the AccessControl tab screen (Figure 10-4) will display the
following dialog screen.

Figure 10-6

Path Information Selection

The [Link Path] button is enabled only when a single LD Set is selected from the tree view located in the Accessible
LD List display area.
The linking of path information with an LD Set means the setting of the HBA’s WWPN of the business server that
actually accesses logical disks or the setting of the port (in the Port mode) of the disk array to which the business server
is connected.

The WWPN (World Wide Port Name) set for the HBA of the business server is necessary for determining whether
to permit access in the WWN mode in the [Path Link] dialog box.
The WWN (World Wide Name) consists of the WWNN (World Wide Node Name) and the WWPN (World Wide
Port Name), and is allocated to the HBA (Host Bus Adaptor; also called FC controller) as ID code information
inherent to the HBA.

For information on the acquisition method, refer to the “Access Control User’s Guide” for

this disk array series.

IV-188

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

Figure 10-7

Figure 10-8

Linking of Path Information (WWPN)

Linking of Path Information (Port Number)

IV-189

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

On this dialog screen, the following operations are possible.
y Path Info Input Field
Newly added or replaced path information is entered into this area. It is necessary to enter 16 single-bit,
hexadecimal digit characters into this input field.
y Port Number Selection Field
The port number to be newly added or to be replaced is selected in this field.

Only ports in port number are

displayed in the field.
y Current Path Info
Displays path information current set for the disk array and path information which has been changed by operating
each button on this dialog screen.
y [Add] button
When new path information is entered into the “Path Info Input Field”, clicking this button will add the entered path
information to the last line of the “Current Path Info” display area.
Select a target port number from “Port Number Selection Field” and click the [Add] button.

The path information

of the selected port number is added to the last line of the “Current Path Info” display area.
Up to 64 pieces of path information can be set for one LD Set.
To apply settings for the disk array, click the [OK] button.

When the [Add] button is clicked, the product purchase situation is checked.

If the upper limit of the Path Count

permitted for the product is reached in the Disk Array as a whole, an error dialog screen appears in this stage, which
makes the linking impossible. Furthermore, a WWPN or port number linked with another LD Set cannot be
registered dually for another LD Set. If an error message showing the situation, specify a different WWPN or port
number.

y [Replace] button
After entering new path information into “Path Info Input Field” and selecting Replace target path information from
the “Current Path Info” display area, clicking this button will replace the path information selected in the “Current
Path Info” display area with newly entered path information.
Select a target port number from “Port Number Selection Field”, select Replace target path information from the
“Current Path Info” display area, and then click the [Replace] button.

The path information of the selected port

number is replaced by the path information selected from the “Current Path Info” display area.

IV-190

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

Only a piece of path information can be selected at a time from the “Current Path Info” display area.
To apply settings for the disk array, click the [OK] button.
y [Delete] button
Selecting Delete target path information from the “Current Path Info” display area and clicking this button will
delete the selected path information from the “Current Path Info” display area.
Only a piece of path information can be selected at a time from the “Current Path Info” display area.
To apply settings for the disk array, click the [OK] button.
y [OK] button
Clicking this button will display the operation confirmation message, and path information shown in the “Current
Path Info” display area will be applied to the disk array.

The WWPN of path information can be set even when the set value is different from the WWPN of the business
server HBA which actually accesses logical disks.

Therefore, pay careful attention not to set a wrong value.

Application of path information immediately reflects on the Disk Array.

Therefore, if setting information is wrong,

there is a possibility that accessing from the business server may not be possible. Pay careful attention to this.
Especially, when settings are wrong for deleting or replacing path information, the business server may suddenly
stop recognizing the logical disk in use.

It is necessary to perform operation after checking the operation state.

Furthermore, stop business or the business server according to the necessity.

y [Cancel] button
When changes made on this dialog screen are not set for the disk array, the following dialog screen will appear and
the execution of the operation will be confirmed.

Figure 10-9

Confirmation Dialog Screen 4

IV-191

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

y [Help] button
Clicking this button will display the Help screen concerning the “Link Path” screen.
If the [Link Path] operation fails, the error dialog screen showing the failure will be displayed.
When an operation request is in error, there is a possibility of inconsistency between the disk array setting
information and the information administrated on the iSM client. Therefore, click [Get Disk Array Info.].

IV-192

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

1100..22..33 C
Chhaannggiinngg tthhee LLD
DS
Seett N
Naam
mee
By clicking right-button after selecting LD Set, the pop-up menu appears allowing selection of name change of
LD Set. Selecting the menu displays the LD Set name change screen.

Figure 10-10

LD Set Pop-up Menu Screen

Figure 10-11 Rename LD Set Screen
For LD Set, specify the platform of the business server that accesses logical disks via the LD Set. Refer to Table 10-1
“Platforms” for the platforms that can be specified.
LD Set name can be specified with 16 characters including arbitrary alphanumeric characters, “/”, and “_”.

However,

if a combination of Platform and LD Set name has been set, new setting can no longer be made.
Clicking the [OK] button displays a dialog for preliminarily confirming the change.
on the dialog sets the new platform and LD set name to the disk array.

IV-193

Clicking the [OK] button again

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

Figure 10-12

Preliminary Confirmation Dialog

When an LD Set is renamed, the disk array dynamically changes individual response control for each OS according
to the platform information.

Therefore, it is necessary to perform operation after checking the operation state.

Furthermore, stop business or the business server according to the necessity.

IV-194

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

1100..22..44 D
Deelleettiinngg aann LLD
DS
Seett
Select an LD Set from the tree view located in the Accessible LD List display area and then click [Delete] button to
delete the LD Set.
The following selection is available for the LD Set.
y Selection of treetop LD Set item
y Selection of single LD Set
y Selection of multiple LD Sets
Clicking the [Delete] button displays the following dialog for confirming the deletion:

Figure 10-13

Preliminary Confirmation Dialog

By deleting an LD Set, the LD Set, logical disk information assigned to the LD Set and path information linked to the
LD Set are deleted.

Deletion of the LD Set immediately reflects on the Disk Array. Therefore, if Delete operation is wrong, the
business server suddenly stops recognizing the logical disk in use.
checking the operation state.

It is necessary to perform Delete operation after

Furthermore, stop business or the business server according to the necessity

IV-195

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

If the [Delete] operation fails, the error dialog screen showing the failure will be displayed.
When an operation request is in error, there is a possibility of inconsistency between the disk array setting information and the
information administrated on the iSM client. Therefore, click [Get Disk Array Info.].

IV-196

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

1100..33 A
Assssiig
gn
niin
ng
g aa L
Lo
og
giiccaall D
Diisskk
1100..33..11 A
Assssiiggnniinngg aa LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk N
Neew
wllyy
When setting permission of access from the business server to logical disks, select LD Sets of a desirable business
server from the tree view in the Accessible LD List display area. Then, select New Setting target logical disks from
the [Candidate LD List] display area, and click [New Setting] button.
Assignment of logical disks by using the [New Setting] button invalidates the current assignment state of logical disks
assigned to the LD Set and newly assigns the logical disks.

Logical disks can be assigned to multiple LD Sets.

A link-volume cannot be assigned to LUN 0.

Clicking the [New Setting] button will display the “LD Setting” dialog screen shown below.

Figure 10-14

LD Setting

Logical disks to be modified are listed in the [Candidate LD List] display area.

IV-197

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

Logical disk information displayed on the “LD Setting” dialog screen is as follows:
LUN
: LUN to which newly added, movable logical disks are assigned
Number
OS Type
Logical Disk Name
RAID
Capacity
On the “LD Setting” dialog screen, the following buttons are operable.
Moreover, one logical disk can be selected at a time to move the logical disk on this dialog screen.

The logical disks

in the list can be sorted into a different order according to an item other than LUN.
[Top]

Moves a selected logical disk to the top line of the logical disk group.

[Up]

Moves a selected logical disk to the previous line.

[Down]

Moves a selected logical disk to the following line.

[Bottom]

Moves a selected logical disk to the end line of the logical disk group.

[OK]

Clicking this button displays a dialog for confirming the new settings.

If the new settings delete logical

disks from the LD set, a dialog for confirming the logical disks to be deleted is displayed, and then a dialog
appears to confirm the new settings.

Figure 10-15

Preliminary Confirmation Dialog (for Logical Disks Deleted)

IV-198

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

Figure 10-16
[Cancel]

Preliminary Confirmation Dialog (for Logical Disks Newly Assigned)

Clicking this button will close the “LD Setting” dialog screen.

Furthermore, the following dialog screen

will be displayed and confirmation will be made about whether to close the “LD Setting” dialog screen or
not by considering the settings invalid.

Figure 10-17 Confirmation Dialog Screen 3

The logical disk display item order can be changed.

For information on the settings, refer to “Client Start/Stop” in

the “User’s Manual” or “User’s Manual (UNIX)” in accordance with the OS in use.

IV-199

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

Application of the New Setting invalidates all of the current assignment settings for the logical disks and new
assignment settings for the logical disk immediately reflect on the Disk Array. Therefore, if setting information is
wrong, the business server suddenly stops recognizing the logical disk in use.
operation after checking the operation state.

It is necessary to perform this

Furthermore, stop business or the business server according to the

necessity.

If the [New Setting] operation fails, the error dialog screen showing the failure will be displayed.
When an operation request is in error, there is a possibility of inconsistency between the disk array setting information
and the information administrated on the iSM client. Therefore, click [Get Disk Array Info.].

IV-200

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

1100..33..22 A
Assssiiggnniinngg aann A
Addddiittiioonnaall LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk
When setting permission of access from the business server to logical disks, select LD Sets of a desirable business
server from the tree view of the Accessible LD List display area. Then, select logical disks to be added from the
[Candidate LD List] display area, and click the [Add] button.
Logical disks will be added to all of the path information linked with the selected LD Sets.

Furthermore, Logical

disks can be added to the LD Sets which are not linked with path information.
Logical disks to be added need to satisfy the following conditions.
y Logical disks must be the following disks.
Ordinary disk
Replication volume set in pairs
Volume with snapshot setting (BV)
Link-volume (LV)
Clicking the [Add] button will display the “LD Setting” dialog screen shown below.

Figure 10-18

LD Setting

The logical disk to be newly added is displayed at the end of the logical disk group which has been assigned on the
“LD Setting” dialog screen, and LUN can be changed by button operation.

However, in the states (1) and (2) stated

below, logical disks to be newly added will be displayed after the selected LUN line:
(1)

The LUN selected in the Accessible LD List display area has not assigned logical disks.

(2)

The number of selected logical disks coincides with the number of lines of the LUN which has not assigned
logical disks or less.

IV-201

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

Furthermore, when selecting multiple LUNs which have not assigned logical disks, the selected LUNs must be
sequential.
Only a newly added logical disk group can be moved on this dialog screen.
LUN displayed as the

Logical disks cannot be moved to the

icon. Furthermore, the LUN to which logical disks have been assigned cannot be changed.

Logical disk information displayed on the “LD Setting” dialog screen is as follows:
LUN
: LUN to which newly added, movable logical disks are assigned
: LUN whose logical disks cannot be moved
Number
OS Type
Logical Disk Name
RAID
Capacity
On the “LD Setting” dialog screen, the following buttons are operable.
[Top]

Moves a selected logical disk in a newly added logical disk group to the top line of the newly added logical
disk group.

[Up]

Moves a selected logical disk in a newly added logical disk group to the previous line of the newly added
logical disk group.

[Down]

Moves a selected logical disk in a newly added logical disk group to the following line of the newly added
logical disk group.

[Bottom]

Moves a selected logical disk in a newly added logical disk group to the end line of the newly added logical
disk group.

[OK]

Clicking this button displays a dialog for preliminarily confirming the addition:

IV-202

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

Figure 10-19
[Cancel]

Preliminary Confirmation Dialog

Clicking this button will close the “LD Setting” dialog screen.

Furthermore, the following dialog screen

will be displayed and confirmation will be made about whether to close the “LD Setting” dialog screen or
not by considering the settings invalid.

Figure 10-20 Confirmation Dialog Screen 1

The logical disk display item order can be changed.

For information on the settings, refer to “Client Start/Stop” in

the “User’s Manual” or “User’s Manual (UNIX)” in accordance with the OS in use.

IV-203

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

•

When performing [Add], logical disks which have been assigned to an Add target LD Set cannot be doubly
added to the LD Set.

•

Logical disks can be assigned to multiple LD Sets.

A link-volume cannot be assigned to LUN 0.

If the [Add] operation fails, the error dialog screen showing the failure will be displayed.
When an operation request is in error, there is a possibility of inconsistency between the disk array setting information
and the information administrated on the iSM client. Therefore, click [Get Disk Array Info.].

IV-204

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

1100..33..33 D
Deeaassssiiggnniinngg aa LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk
When setting inaccessibility from the business server to logical disks, stop the assignment.

In this case, select logical

disks or LD Sets of a desirable business server from the Accessible LD List display area, and then click the [Delete]
button.
Logical disks that can be deleted are as follows:
y Ordinary disk
y Replication volume set in pairs
y Volume with snapshot setting (BV)
y Link-volume (LV)
Clicking the [Delete] button displays the following dialog for confirming the deletion:

Figure 10-21

Preliminary Confirmation Dialog

When selected logical disks are assigned to multiple LD Sets, the following dialog screen is displayed and the
execution of the Delete operation to multiple LD Sets is reconfirmed.

IV-205

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

Figure 10-22 Confirmation Dialog Screen 2
This operation deletes logical disks from the target LD Set only which has been selected through its check box.
Logical disks which have been deleted from all of the LD Sets belong to the Preserve Group.
The Delete operation deletes explicitly selected logical disks or the logical disks assigned to the explicitly selected LD
Set.

Therefore, logical disks assigned to the unselected LD Set are not deleted.

Deletion of the logical disk from the LD Set immediately reflects on the Disk Array. If Delete operation is wrong,
the business server suddenly stops recognizing the logical disk in use.

It is necessary to perform Delete operation

after checking the operation state. Furthermore, stop business or the business server according to the necessity.

If the [Delete] operation fails, the error dialog screen showing the failure will be displayed.
When an operation request is in error, there is a possibility of inconsistency between the disk array setting information
and the information administrated on the iSM client. Therefore, click [Get Disk Array Info.].

IV-206

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

1100..44 S
Sttaarrttiin
ng
g tth
hee A
Acccceessss C
Co
on
nttrro
oll
Start the Access Control on the following screen.

Figure 10-23

[Setting/Reference] Tab Screen

IV-207

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

(1) [Start Access Control] button
Clicking this button will validate Access Control settings from the business server to logical disks.
Clicking the [Start Access Control] button displays the following confirmation message:

Figure 10-24

Start Access Control

In the iSM client, once Access Control has been started, Access Control cannot be stopped.

(If necessary,

consult with a maintenance engineer.)
If Access Control is already in operation, the [Start Access Control] button is inoperable.

The Start Access Control operation immediately reflects on the Disk Array. Therefore, if assignment of logical
disks to LD Sets or Link Path settings is wrong, there is a possibility that accessing from the business server to
logical disks may not be possible. It is necessary to perform operation after checking the operation state.
Furthermore, stop business or the business server according to the necessity.

IV-208

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

1100..55 A
Acccceessss C
Co
on
nttrro
oll S
Sccrreeeen
n
This section describes functions available when you purchase program product "AccessControl".
The Access Control is optional software.
The Access Control provides functions to set and unset information on accessibility from the business server to logical
disks.

1100..55..11 A
Acccceessss C
Coonnttrrooll S
Seettttiinngg S
Sccrreeeenn
Clicking the [Setting Access Control] button from the Configuration - [Setting Mode] screen of the iSM client will
display the following setting screen.

Figure 10-25

[AccessControl] Tab Screen

(1) Accessible LD List
Consists of a tree view showing the relation between the LD Set and the path information and a list view of the
Logical disk List assigned to the LD Set or path information.
(a)

Tree view
In the tree view, LD Sets can be selected by activating their check boxes and various types of information can be

IV-209

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

listed in the list view by clicking tree items.
y In the tree view, LD Sets and path information linked with the LD Sets are displayed.
: Item that shows all LD Sets
: LD Set linked with path information
: LD Set unlinked with path information
The following two icons indicate abnormal settings.

If these icons are displayed, it is necessary to change the

setting to the normal setting.
: LD Set in which a port in the WWN mode and a port in the Port mode are mixed
: LD Set in which the assignment of logical disks is different for each path information item
y By clicking right-button after selecting LD Set, the pop-up menu appears allowing selection of name change of
LD Set. Selecting the menu displays the LD Set name change screen.
y Check boxes are displayed for the “LD Set” item that shows all LD Sets in the tree item, each LD Set name, and
path information linked with the LD Sets in the tree item.
Furthermore, a check box for path information is activated associated with a check box for the linked LD Set.
Check boxes are used for the following purposes:
y Select [Add], [New Setting] logical disks target LD Set
y Select [Link Path] target LD Set
y Select [Delete] target LD Set
y Select LD Set to [Delete] assigned logical disks
However, when selecting multiple LD Sets simultaneously to [Add]/[Delete] logical disks, the assignment states
of logical disks for all the LD Sets must coincide.
When activating the check boxes, display contents of the list view are switched as follows:
y When selecting an LD Set, the list of the logical disks assigned to the selected LD Set is displayed.
y When selecting multiple LD Sets, if the assignment states of logical disks for all the selected LD Sets are the
same, the list of logical disks is displayed.
y If the assignment states of logical disks for the selected LD Sets do not coincide, the list of the selected LD Sets
is displayed.

IV-210

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

(b)

List view
y Items displayed in the list of logical disks are as follows:
LUN
Order in which logical disks are recognized by the business server
: LUN to which logical disks are assigned
: LUN to which logical disks are not assigned
Number
OS Type
Logical Disk Name
RAID
Capacity
Purpose
RPL

Logical disks set in pairs only for replication

snapshot

Logical disks with snapshot setting (BV)

Link-volume

Logical disks set as a link-volume (LV)

RPL/snapshot

Logical disks set in pairs for replication and snapshot setting

(Blank)

Ordinary disk with no special purpose settings

Port (Displayed when using a disk array to which “AccessControl (WWN)” is applied)
yes

Logical disk assigned to a Port mode port

(Blank)

Logical disk which is not assigned to a Port mode port

However, the port items are automatically displayed only when a Port mode port exists.

The logical disk display item order can be changed.

For information on the settings, refer to “Client Start/Stop” in

the “User’s Manual” or “User’s Manual (UNIX)” in accordance with the OS in use.

When LD Sets are not selected by using check boxes in the tree view, the list view is displayed in gray
background color and LUN selection is not possible.

Furthermore, when LD Sets are selected by using check

boxes, the list view is not displayed by clicking the “LD Set” item which shows all the LD Sets or by clicking an
individual LD Set.
y When clicking the “LD Set” item which shows all the LD Sets, items displayed in the list of LD Sets are as
follows:
Platform
: LD Set linked with path information
: LD Set unlinked with path information
The following two icons indicate abnormal settings.
setting to the normal setting.

IV-211

If these icons are displayed, it is necessary to change the

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

: LD Set in which a port in the WWN mode and a port in the Port mode are mixed
: LD Set in which the assignment of logical disks is different for each path information item
LD Set Name
Path Count

Figure 10-26 Accessible LD List 1
y If LD Sets which have different assignment of logical disk are checked, items displayed in the list are as
follows:
Platform
: LD Set linked with path information
: LD Set unlinked with path information
The following two icons indicate abnormal settings.

If these icons are displayed, it is necessary to change the

setting to the normal setting.
: LD Set in which a port in the WWN mode and a port in the Port mode are mixed
: LD Set in which the assignment of logical disks is different for each path information item
LD Set Name
Pattern

Figure 10-27 Accessible LD List 2

IV-212

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

y If a port in the WWN mode and a port in the Port mode are mixed in a checked LD Set, the display items in the
list are as follows:

Path (port numbers and names are displayed together.)
Mode

Figure 10-28 Accessible LD List - Mixed Mode List Display
y If the assignment of logical disks for each path information (port) of a checked LD Set does not match, the
display items in the list are as follows:

Path (port numbers and names are displayed together.)
Pattern

Figure 10-29 Accessible LD List - Port Information List Display

IV-213

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

y If the assignment of logical disks for each path information (WWPN) of a checked LD Set does not match, the
display items in the list are as follows:

Path
Pattern

Figure 10-30 Accessible LD List - Path Information List
y When the assignment states of logical disks of the check-marked LD Sets for each path information item do not
coincide, items displayed in the list are as follows:


Figure 10-31 Accessible LD List - Logical Disk List

IV-214

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

An LD Set is a virtual concept that shows the aggregate of logical disks bound by the iSM.

However, there is a

possibility that the assignments of logical disks for each path may not coincide due to communication failures during
setting.
Ensure consistency according to the following procedure.
Take a note of a path to which wrong logical disks are assigned (the same characters are displayed for the same
contents in the Pattern column). Next, after deleting wrong paths once from the Link Path screen, click the [Get
Disk Array Info.] button.

Check that the LD Set icon is returned from Red to Blue in the Accessible LD List,

restore necessary link paths on the Link Path screen again.
Rebuilding is also possible by assigning logical disks again by using [New Setting].

y Display items can be sorted, but their order cannot be changed.
y LUN to which logical disks are not assigned is made blank.
y When selecting delete target logical disks, one logical disk or multiple logical disks can be simultaneously
selected.

(c)

Various Operation Buttons
Operation buttons shown below can be used for logical disks in the Accessible LD List.
Each button is enabled under defined conditions.

For details, refer to the explanation of operation.

y Logical Disk [Add] button
y Logical Disk [Delete] button
Furthermore, LD Set related operation buttons shown below can be used regardless of logical disk selection.
y LD Set [New] button
y LD Set [Delete] button
y LD Set [Link Path] button
y Right button after LD Set selection

IV-215

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

(2) Candidate LD List
This is a list view of logical disks which can be assigned to LD Sets.

Selective display is possible by entering

keywords in the combo box.
(a)

List view
y Display items are as follows:
Number
OS Type
Logical Disk Name
RANK/Pool No. (The pool number is displayed only on the disk array with pool (in hexadecimal and with four
digits.)
Pool Name (displayed only on the disk array with pool.)
RAID
Capacity
Group
Preserve

Logical disk assigned to an LD Set

(Blank)

Logical disks in the Preserve Group

Purpose
RPL

Logical disks set in pairs only for replication

snapshot

Logical disks with snapshot setting (BV)

Link-volume

Logical disks set as link-volume (LV)

RPL/snapshot Logical disks set in pairs for replication and snapshot setting
(Blank)

Ordinary disk with no special purpose settings

Port (Displayed when using a disk array to which “AccessControl(WWN)” is applied)
yes

Logical disk assigned to a port mode port

(Blank)

Logical disk which is not assigned to a port mode port

However, the port items are automatically displayed only when a Port mode port exists.

The logical disk display item order can be changed.

For information on the settings, refer to “Client Start/Stop” in

the “User’s Manual” or “User’s Manual (UNIX)” in accordance with the OS in use.

y Display items can be sorted, but their order cannot be changed.
y Logical disks assigned to LD Sets are also displayed.
y When selecting logical disks which are to be assigned to business, one logical disk or multiple logical disks can be
simultaneously selected.

IV-216

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

(b)

Display Selection Combo Box
Using the following keywords makes it possible to narrow down the display of logical disks in the [Candidate LD
List].
Table 10-2

Display Selection of Logical Disk

Selection Information

Display of Logical Disks

“LD Set Name”
(Ex. “NX:UNIX_Server01”)

Displays only logical disks which have already been assigned to the LD Set

“Platform: *” (Ex. “NX: *”)

Displays only logical disks of the Platform

“ : *”

Displays only logical disks whose Platform has not been set

“**h-**h (*)”
(Ex. “04h-00h (Server01)”)

Displays only logical disks that are assigned to ports in the Port mode.

“Preserve Group”

Displays logical disks in the Preserve Group.
Target logical disks include logical disks with no special purpose settings,
logical disks set in pairs for replication, logical disks for snapshots (BV only
displayed. SV and SDV are not displayed), and logical disks set as
link-volume.

“ALL”

Displays all logical disks in the [Candidate LD List].
(Default settings)

(c)

Various Operation Buttons
Operation buttons shown below can be used for logical disks in the [Candidate LD List].
Each button is enabled under defined conditions.

For details, refer to the explanation of operation.

y Logical Disk [Add] button
y Logical Disk [New Setting] button
y All Selection check box
Furthermore, LD Set related operation buttons shown below can be used regardless of logical disk selection.
y LD Set [New] button
y LD Set [Delete] button
y LD Set [Link Path] button
y Right button after LD Set selection

IV-217

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

Perform individual operations for LD Sets on the following screen

Figure 10-32

[AccessControl] Tab Screen

(3) [Get Disk Array Info.] button
Clicking this button will re-acquire information from the disk array necessary for operations on the AccessControl
screen.
Normally, it is not necessary to use this button to re-acquire information from the disk array. If operations for
the disk array on this screen fail, causing inconsistency between the disk array setting information and the
information administrated on the iSM client and making normal operation impossible, use this button.
After clicking this button and while information is being acquired from the disk array, the following dialog screen
will be displayed.

Figure 10-33

Information Being Acquired

IV-218

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

When canceling the acquisition of information by clicking the [Cancel] button while the information is being
acquired, or the acquisition of information fails, there is a possibility that disk array information administrated by
the iSM client may be wrong.

Therefore, re-acquire information from the disk array through [Get Disk Array

Info.].

(4) [All Selection] check box
This check box is used to perform auxiliary operation to select logical disks from the [Candidate LD List] display
area.
This check box enables the auxiliary selection operation as shown below.
y Activate the check box
Selects all logical disks displayed in the [Candidate LD List].
y Deactivate the check box
Unselect logical disks currently selected and displayed in the [Candidate LD List].

IV-219

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

1100..55..22 A
Acccceessss C
Coonnttrrooll S
Sttaarrtt//M
Mooddee C
Chhaannggee S
Sccrreeeenn
Items that can be set on the [Setting/Reference] tab screen are as follows:
y Setting Access Control
y Product Information (reference only)
Contents of each item and setting information are described below.

Figure 10-34

[Setting/Reference] Tab Screen

(1) “Setting Access Control” field
The following setting can be performed in this field.
y Change Port Mode
y Start Access Control

IV-220

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

(2) “Product Information” field
This field displays information on the AccessControl product required for setting information on accessibility to
logical disks.
y Purchase Product Classification:

Displays the type of the purchased AccessControl product.

y Product Use Situation:

Displays the maximum number of path information links permitted for the
AccessControl product and the current number of path information links.

IV-221

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

1100..55..33 A
Acccceessss C
Coonnttrrooll S
Seettttiinngg C
Coonnffiirrm
maattiioonn
S
Sccrreeeenn
Starting Access Control in setting mode displays the following warning dialog box to warn the users:

Figure 10-35 Warning Dialog Box at Start
Clicking the [Cancel] button in the warning dialog box at start returns to the Configuration- [Setting Mode] screen
below.

IV-222

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

Figure 10-36 Configuration- [Setting Mode] Screen
Similarly, the following dialog boxes also display a warning message when an attempt is made to perform operation:
[05317], [05318], [05319], [05325], [05326], [05327], [05373], [05384], and [05385]

Figure 10-37

Sample of Warning Message Display

IV-223

Chapter 10 Access Control Operations

For any operation which displays this warning dialog, a message appears to ask you whether you really want to make
setting changes to the disk array.

Figure 10-38 Confirmation Message

IV-224

Appendix A

Specifications

Appendix A Specifications
A
A..11 S
Sp
peecciiffiieed
dN
Nu
um
mb
beerr o
off D
Diisskk A
Arrrraayyss tto
oB
Bee
S
Seett
At most one disk array can be set from the iSM client simultaneously (not including LD Batch Binding and Pair
Batch Setting).

A
A..22 N
Nu
um
mb
beerr o
off L
LD
DS
Seettss L
Lo
occaattaab
bllee iin
nO
On
nee
D
Diisskk A
Arrrraayy
Table A-1 shows the maximum number of LD Sets locatable in one disk array.
Table A-1 Max. No. of LD Sets Locatable in One Disk Array
Disk Array Series
Max. No. of LD Sets*
1000 series

128

2000 series

128

3000 series

256

4000 series

256

* Calculate the number of new LD Sets you can create by subtracting the number of LD Sets with no path
specified and the number of paths linked with LD Sets from the maximum number of LD Sets locatable.

A
A..33 S
Sp
peecciiffiieed
dN
Nu
um
mb
beerr o
off P
Paatth
hss tto
oB
Bee S
Seett ffo
orr
L
LD
DS
Seett
At most 64 paths can be set for a LD Set.

1

Appendix A

Specifications

A
A..44 N
Nu
um
mb
beerr o
off L
LD
Dss L
Lo
occaattaab
bllee iin
nO
On
nee L
LD
DS
Seett
Table A-2 shows the maximum number of LDs and LUNs locatable in one LD Set.

Access
Control
ON

Table A-2
License
Required

Specifications for LDs Locatable When Access Control Is ON
Max. No. of
Access Mode
Disk Array
Locatable LDs

AccessControl
(WWN)

Port mode

1000/2000 series

1024

0000h to 03ffh

(to be set by
maintenance
personnel)

3000/4000 series

4096

0000h to 0fffh

AccessControl

WWN mode

100/1000/2000 series

512

0000h to 01ffh

3000/4000 series

512

0000h to 01ffh

100/1000/2000/2800
series

512

0000h to 01ffh

3000/4000 series

512

0000h to 01ffh

Port mode, WWN
mode

OFF

Specifiable
LUN

None

Port mode for
ACOS-4 resources (to
be set by maintenance
personnel)

2000 series

1024

0000h to 03ffh

4000 series

4096

0000h to 0fffh

None

100/1000/2000/2800
series

1024

0000h to 03ffh

3000/4000 series

4096

0000h to 0fffh

Note: The number of LDs you can actually use depends on the operating system on the business server.

A
A..55 N
No
otteess o
on
nB
Biin
nd
diin
ng
g aa P
Po
oo
oll
Although you can bind dynamic pools with up to 120 physical disks on S2400 disk array and up to 240 physical disks
on S2800 disk array, you can use up to 60 physical disks when you bind a pool.

Thus, to use 61 or more physical

disks, you need to expand dynamic pools by adding physical disks.
In addition, when you expand a dynamic pool, you can add up to 60 physical disks at a time.

2

Appendix B

Configuration Setting Command

Appendix B Configuration Setting
Command
This chapter explains how to operate the configuration setup command that is performed through the Command
Line Interface (CLI) from the iSM server.

B
B..11 N
Neettw
wo
orrkk R
Reelliieeff S
Seettttiin
ng
gC
Co
om
mm
maan
nd
d
((iiS
SM
Mn
neettcco
on
nff))
The iSMnetconf command sets the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address of a target disk
array’s Service Processor, limits permission for access from the monitoring server, and refers to the
information. The iSMnetconf command operates on a host that is connected with the disk array
through FC.

Make Service Processor settings for general operation through iSM client’s configuration

setting (GUI), 9.3 “Network”. Use the iSMnetconf command if monitoring via the Ether path is
disabled due to wrong operation or the like.

The iSMnetconf command is installed at the same time

the “Storage Manager Volume List”, “ReplicationControl”, or “SnapControl” is installed.

3

Appendix B

Configuration Setting Command

B
B..22 S
Sttaarrtt aan
nd
dS
Stto
op
po
off N
Neettw
wo
orrkk R
Reelliieeff
S
ng
gC
Co
om
mm
maan
nd
d
Seettttiin
(1) Start of the iSMnetconf command
To start the command, enter iSMnetconf in the command line. If options are omitted, the
program version and the usage are displayed as shown below.
iSMnetconf

Version x.x

Usage : iSMnetconf

{-arrayname  | -specialfile }
[-number ]
{[-ipaddress ] | [-subnetmask ] |
[-gateway ] |
[-addscsivalidaddress ] |
[-chgscsivalidaddress  ] |
[-delscsivalidaddress ] |
[-scsiguardinvalid {on | off}]}
[-ipcheckinvalid {on | off}] [-force]

iSMnetconf

{-arrayname < Array Name> | -specialfile }
[-number ] -view

iSMnetconf

-file  [-ipcheckinvalid {on | off}] [-force]

* The above is a display sample. The actual program version is displayed for Version.

(2) iSMnetconf command options
The following explains the functions of the iSMnetconf command and the corresponding options:
-addscsivalidaddress option:

Adds the IP address of the monitoring server for which
access is permitted.

The IP address added with this

option takes effect when the access restriction function
is enabled (scsiguardinvalid is off).

Up to eight of

this option, including the chgscsivalidaddress and
delscsivalidaddress options, can be specified
simultaneously. The total number of IP addresses
that can be added per disk array is 8 when SCSI
Socket Valid IP addresses, SNMP Trap Transmission
IP addresses, and SNMP Valid IP addresses are all
combined.

4

Appendix B

-arrayname option:

Configuration Setting Command

Specifies the name of the target disk array.
Since the relationship between the disk array name and
the special file name (UNIX version) or disk number
(Windows version) is obtained from the “volume
information data”, it is necessary to confirm that the
“volume information data” has been updated to the
latest version. For information on how to update the
“volume information data”, refer to “volume list
command” in the “User’s Manual” or “User’s Manual
(UNIX)” in accordance with the OS in use.

-chgscsivalidaddress option:

Changes the IP address of the monitoring server for
which access is permitted.

The IP address changed

with this option takes effect when the access
restriction function is enabled (scsiguardinvalid is off).
Up to eight of this option, including the
addscsivalidaddress and delscsivalidaddress options,
can be specified simultaneously.
-delscsivalidaddress option:

Deletes the IP address of the monitoring server for
which access is permitted.

The IP address changed

with this option takes effect when the access
restriction function is enabled (scsiguardinvalid is off).
Up to eight of this option, including the
addscsivalidaddress and chgscsivalidaddress options,
can be specified simultaneously.
-file option:

Reads the file storing the settings and sets the service
processor.

The settings can be made for multiple

disk arrays simultaneously.
-force option:

Forcibly makes settings even during configuration
setting by another configuration setup command.

-gateway option:

Sets a Gateway Address.

Specify the Gateway

Address in the input format of “aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd” (in
decimal).
-ipaddress option:

Sets the IP Address of the target disk array. Specify
the IP Address in the input format of
“aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd” (in decimal).

-ipcheckinvalid option:

Enables the omission of a check on if the IP Address
specified in the ipaddress option is already used by
another network equipment. The option also enables
the omission of a check conducted to see whether any
of the IP addresses specified with the ipaddress,
subnetmask, gateway, addscsivalidaddress,

5

Appendix B

Configuration Setting Command

chgscsivalidaddress, and delscsivalidaddress options is
invalid.
-number option:

Specifies the target Service Processor number.

-scsiguardinvalid option:

Determines whether to validate/invalidate the limit for
access from monitoring servers connected through
Ether.

If “off” is specified, the limit for access from

monitoring servers becomes valid, and only
monitoring servers at registered IP Addresses are
permitted to make access.

If “on” is specified, the

limit for access from monitoring servers becomes
invalid, and monitoring servers at any IP Addresses
are permitted to make access. Therefore, be careful
in specifying “on” for this option.
-specialfile option:

Specifies the special file name of the target disk array.
The special file name is displayed by the “volume list
command”.

For details on the command, refer to the

“volume list command” explained in the “User’s
Manual” or “User’s Manual (UNIX)” in accordance
with the OS in use.
-subnetmask option:

Sets a Subnet Mask.

Specify the Subnet Mask in the

input format of “aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd” (in decimal). The
subnet of the disk array’s IP Address is set by
specifying this option.
-view option:

Displays Service Processor information.

If a Service

Processor number is specified in the “number” option,
the information of only the specified Service Processor
is displayed.

If the “number” option is omitted, the

information of all the Service Processors is displayed.

(3) Termination of the iSMnetconf command
When the iSMnetconf command terminates normally, a message is displayed indicating
successful operation if a setting option is specified.
for the option is displayed.

6

If a reference option is specified, the item

Appendix B

Configuration Setting Command

B
B..22..11 E
Exxaam
mppllee ooff D
Diissppllaayyiinngg O
Oppttiioonnss
(1) Setting of a Service Processor
The following shows the setting of the Service Processor of a target disk array.
>iSMnetconf -arrayname Storage2300 -number 00h -ipaddress 192.168.0.1 -scsiguardinvalid off
iSMnetconf 001 : Command Complete Successfully.

(2) Reference to various types of Service Processor information
The following shows reference to various types of Service Processor information of a target disk
array.

If the -number option is omitted, the information of all the Service Processors in the target

disk array is displayed.
>iSMnetconf -arrayname Storage2300 -number 00h -view
… (a)

--- Service Processor Information --Number(h) : 00
State

: ready
… (b)

--- Disk Array TCP/IP Information --IP Address

: 192.168.0.1

Subnet Mask

: 255.255.255.0

Gateway Address : 192.168.0.254
… (c)

--- SCSI Socket Information --SCSI Socket Guard Invalid

: off

SCSI Socket Valid IP Address : 192.168.0.5
… (d)

--- SNMP Information --Community Name

: public

SNMP Trap Transmission IP Address : 192.168.0.5
: 192.168.0.6
SNMP Valid

: off

SNMP Valid IP Address

: 192.168.0.5
: 192.168.0.7
… (e)

--- Trap Information --Trap Sense Interval

: 5 second(s)

Unit Contact

: XXX, Manager Name, 8-23-xxxxx

7

Appendix B

Configuration Setting Command

Unit Name

: Storage2300

Unit Location

: Fuchu-shi

Unit Info

: Setting Date 2003/01/01

The display items are as follows:
(a) Service Processor Information
Displays the information of a target Service Processor.
Number(h): Service Processor number
State:

Service Processor state

(b) Disk Array TCP/IP Information
Displays the TCP/IP information of a target disk array.
IP Address:

IP Address of the disk array

Subnet Mask:

Subnet Mask of the disk array

Gateway Address: Gateway Address of the disk array
(c) SCSI Socket Information
Displays the information of monitoring servers.
SCSI Socket Guard Invalid:

Indicates that the limit for access from monitoring servers
connected through Ether is valid/invalid.
on:

The limit for access from monitoring servers
connected through Ether becomes invalid, and
monitoring servers at any IP Addresses are permitted
to make access.

off: The limit for access from monitoring servers
connected through Ether becomes valid, and only
monitoring servers at registered IP Addresses are
permitted to make access.
SCSI Socket Valid IP Address: IP Address of a monitoring server that is permitted to make
access.

8

“---” is displayed if no IP Addresses are registered.

Appendix B

Configuration Setting Command

(d) SNMP Information
Displays the SNMP-related information
Community Name:

Displays the community name.

SNMP Trap Transmission IP Address:

IP address to which trap messages are to be
transmitted.

If no IP address is registered, “---” is

displayed.
SNMP Valid:

Indicates whether the SNMP request restriction is
valid or invalid.
on:

The SNMP request restriction is invalid,
accepting SNMP requests from any host.

off: The SNMP request restriction is valid,
accepting SNMP requests only from registered
hosts.
SNMP Valid IP Address:

IP address from which SNMP requests are accepted.
If no IP address is registered, “---” is displayed.

(e) Trap Information
Displays the trap-related information.
Trap Sense Interval:

Displays the SNMP trap sense interval.

Unit Contact:

Displays the management information transmitted in
the SNMP trap.

Unit Name:

Displays the system name transmitted in the SNMP
trap.

Unit Location:

Displays the installation location information
transmitted in the SNMP trap.

Unit Info:

Displays the other information transmitted in the
SNMP trap.

9

Appendix B

Configuration Setting Command

B
B..22..22 S
Seettttiinngg FFiillee
(1) File header
When the following identifier line is written at the beginning of a file, that file can be identified as
the setting file of this command.
# iSMnetconf Configuration File Version x.x.

(2) Sections and items
In the setting file, specify parameters using sections and items.
y [Target Disk Array] section
Specify the disk array and service processor number to be set.

This section is always required.

array name item:

Specify the disk array name.

special file item:

Specify the special file name (UNIX version) or disk
number (Windows version).

number item:

Specify the service processor number.

y [Disk Array TCP/IP Information] section
Specify the network-related items for the disk array.
ip address item:

Specify the IP address of the disk array.

subnet mask item:

Specify the subnet mask of the disk array.

gateway address:

Specify the gateway address of the disk array.

y [SCSI Socket Information] section
Specify the items related to the restriction of access from the monitoring server.
scsi socket guard invalid item:

Specify whether the restriction of access from the
monitoring server is valid or invalid.

scsi valid address item:

Specify the IP address of the monitoring server for which
access is permitted.

10

Appendix B

Configuration Setting Command

(3) Example of the setting file
An example of the setting file is shown below.
# iSMnetconf Configuration File Version x.x
[Target Disk Array]
array name = Storage2300
number = 00h
[Disk Array TCP/IP Information]
ip address = 192.168.0.1
subnet mask = 255.255.255.0
gateway address = 192.168.0.254
[SCSI Socket Information]
scsi guard invalid = off
scsi valid address = 192.168.0.5

(4) Notes
y A line beginning with “#” is treated as a comment.
y Space and horizontal tab characters are ignored.
y It is necessary to specify either the array name item or special file item in the [Target Disk
Array] section. If neither or both of them are specified, an error occurs.
y When the target disk array has only one service processor, the number item can be omitted.
y Up to eight scsi valid address items can be specified simultaneously.
y When more than one scsi valid address item is specified, only the IP addresses that are specified
with this option are registered as IP addresses for which access is permitted.
y It is necessary to specify the sections and items in the order shown in (2) “Sections and items”.
y By repeating the sequence of sections and items, beginning with the [Target Disk Array] section,
more than one disk array can be specified as the setting target.

11

Appendix C RAID

Appendix C RAID
C
C..11 R
RA
AIID
D
The word RAID was first introduced in the thesis “A Case for Redundant Arrays of Inexpensive Disks”
released by professors of the University of California at Berkeley of the U.S.A. in 1987.
The initials RAID of “Redundant Arrays of Inexpensive Disks” mean literally “a set of redundant and
inexpensive disks”. However, RAID has been generally explained with “Inexpensive” replaced by
“Independent” in these days. Large-capacity hard disks were very expensive at that time, but I/O
performance was not high enough for the costs. Disk access was a bottleneck in system performance.
RAID was created for the following purposes:
y Reducing costs by using inexpensive small-capacity disks
y Improving performance by concurrently accessing multiple disks
y Increasing reliability by adding redundant data
RAID levels 1 to 5 are defined in the thesis mentioned above.

However, the table below shows the

features of RAID0 (striping), RAID1, RAID5, RAID10, RAID50, and RAID6 only.

RAID0 (striping)

has no redundancy and does not satisfy all requirements for RAID, but it is in wide use.

RAID10 is a

combination of RAID0 and RAID1.

RAID6 can

RAID50 is a combination of RAID0 and RAID5.

keep redundancy by its double-parity feature even if one physical disk becomes faulty.
Each RAID number is used simply to sort out data division methods or repair methods, and the RAID
numbers do not indicate any priority.

12

Appendix C RAID

RAID
Level

Redundancy

Required
Number of
PDs

Decrease in
Capacity

RAID 0

None

1 or
more *1, *3

None

RAID 1

Dual
configuration

Advantage

Quick access

Disadvantage
Inaccessible when even a
single disk fails

High reliability

RAID 5

RAID6

Parity

Double parity

2

No performance
deterioration in reduced
state

50%

*4

3 or more

*5

6 or more

Costly

Parity data read required
for writing

Equivalent
to capacity
of 1 disk

Concurrent processing for
multiple R/W commands

Equivalent
to capacity
of 2/6 or
2/10 disks

It is necessary to read
The most reliable
parity when writing data.
(redundancy secured on a
failure of one physical disk) The accessibility to data
drops on degradation.

Performance deterioration
in reduced state

Quick access
RAID10

Dual
configuration

RAID50

Parity

4 or
more *2, *6

10 or more

*7

High reliability
50%

No performance
deterioration in reduced
state

Equivalent
to capacity
of 1/5 disks

Concurrent processing for
multiple R/W commands
Quick access

*1:

100/1000/2000 series disk array: 1, 3, 5, 10, or 15 disks

*2:

100/1000/2000 series disk array: 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, or 14 disks

*3:

S400/S1400/S2400/S2800 disk array: Not available for configuration

*4:

S400/S1400/S2400/S2800 disk array: 5 disks

Costly

It is necessary to read
parity when writing data.
The accessibility to data
drops on degradation.

*5: S400/S1400/S2400/S2800 disk array: 6 or more disks (4+PQ) and 10 or more (8+PQ)
*6:

S400/S1400/S2400/S2800 disk array: 4, 8, or 16 disks

*7:

S400/S1400/S2400/S2800 disk array: 10 or 20 disks

13

Appendix C RAID

(1) RAID0

Data Sent from Host
Stripe1 Stripe2 Stripe3 Stripe4 Stripe5

Stripe1
Stripe4

Stripe2
Stripe5

Stripe3
Striping Size

Physical Disk1

2

3

This method slices data (send from the host) in a striping size and distributes the data to the
physical disks of the RAID.
If processing is performed concurrently for the physical disks of the RAID, the data transfer time
is reduced to 1/(number of PDs) and data can be accessed quickly. Since RAID0 has no
redundant data, 100% of the disk capacity is available.

However, data cannot be accessed when

even a single disk fails.

y Quick access
y Highest availability of the disk capacity

y RAID0 has no redundant data. Thus, it is inaccessible when even a single disk fails.
y Since more than one physical disk is used, reliability becomes 1/number of PDs.

Since RAID0 has no redundancy, all the data is lost when even a single disk fails. iSM does not
recommend RAID0.

Use another RAID configuration.

14

Appendix C RAID

(2) RAID1
Data Sent from Host
Block1

Block 2

Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4

Block 3

Block 4

Block 5

Block 5

Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
Block 5

Physical Disk1

2

This method writes data (sent from the host) onto two disks (or into 2 disk groups). (Mirroring)
RAID1 has the same data in dual configuration. Thus, even if one disk fails, the other disk
enables access to the data.
In comparison with a single disk, RAID1 achieves the equivalent performance in write operation,
and up to the double throughput as performance in read operation by accessing two disks
containing the same data.
RAID1 offers data reliability higher than any other RAIDs do, but redundant data takes up 50% of
the disk capacity.

y High reliability
y No performance deterioration when a single disk fails
y Performance in read operation can be up to twice as high as the throughput of a single disk.

y Redundant data takes up a half of the disk capacity.

15

Appendix C RAID

(3) RAID5
Data Sent from Host
Stripe1 Stripe2 Stripe3 Stripe4 StripeN
Parity Generation

Stripe1
Stripe3

Stripe2
Parity(3,4)

Parity(N,N+1)

StripeN

Physical Disk1

Parity(1,2)
Stripe4
StripeN+1

2

Striping Size

3

This method slices data (sent from the host) in certain striping size and distributes the data to the
physical disks of the RAID. It also distributes the parity data to the disks.
Since RAID5 distributes parity data to multiple disks, it enables concurrent processing at disk
access.

Thus, RAID5 is suitable for processing which often makes random access to small files

in size of several kilobytes.
Even if one of the disks fails, access can be made to the parity data.

However, performance in

read operation lowers in this case.

y Concurrent processing by using distributed parity data
y Availability of processing which often makes random access

y If one of the physical disks constituting logical disks fails, performance in read operation
lowers.

16

Appendix C RAID

(4) RAID6

Data Sent from Host
Stripe 1

Stripe 3

Stripe 2

Stripe 4

Stripe 5

Parity 1 Generation

Stripe 6

Stripe N

...

Parity 2 Generation

Stripe 1

Stripe 2

Parity 1 (1, 2)

Parity 2 (1, 2)
Stripe 4

Stripe 3

Parity 1 (3, 4)

Parity 2 (3, 4)

Parity 1 (5, 6)

Parity 2 (5, 6)

Stripe 5

Stripe 6

Parity 2 (N, N+1)

Stripe N

Stripe N+1

Parity 1 (N, N+1)

Physical Disk 1

2

3

4

Striping Size

This method slices data sent from the host in certain striping size and distributes the slices into the
physical disks of the RAID. While doing that, it generates two parity data per block and
distributes the respective parities into the disks.
RAID6 supports double parity, therefore it secures redundancy even if one disk becomes faulty
and also ensures accessibility even if two disks become faulty.

However, the capability for

reading data degrades in case of a disk failure.
In addition to that, RAID6 distributes parity data to multiple disks, it enables concurrent
processing for access to the disks.

Thus, RAID6 is suitable for random access to small files in

size of several kilobytes.

y Redundancy secured if one physical disk becomes faulty, and high reliability and availability if
two disks become faulty.
y Concurrent processing by using distributed parities
y Suitable for random access

y If two physical disks used for the logical disks fail, the capability for reading data degrades.

17

Appendix C RAID

(5) RAID10

Data Sent from Host
Block1

Block2

Block1

Block1

Block3
Block5

Block3
Block5

Physical Disk 1

2

Block3

Block4

Block2
Block4

Block5

Block2
Block4

3

4

This method slices data (sent from the host) and distributes (RAID0) the data to pairs of mirrored
disks (RAID1).
Since RAID10 distributes data to multiple disks, it enables concurrent processing and makes
quick access.

In addition, it has the same data in dual configuration.

Even if one of the disks

fails, the other disk enables access to the data.
Reliability is about 1/n (n: number of paired sets of RAID1 disks) of RAID1 consisting of two
disks.

Reliability is lower than that of a single RAID1, but it is still high enough.


y High reliability
y Quick access
y No performance deterioration when a single disk fails

y Redundant data takes up a half of the disk capacity.

18

Appendix C RAID

(6) RAID50

Data Sent from Host

Stripe 1

Stripe 2

Stripe 3

Stripe 4

Stripe 5

Stripe 6

Stripe 7

Stripe 8

Stripe 9

Parity Generation

Stripe 10

Stripe N

Parity Generation

Stripe 1

Stripe 2

Parity (1, 2)

Stripe 3

Stripe 4

Stripe 5

Parity (5, 6)

Stripe 6

Stripe 7

Parity (7, 8)

Stripe 8

Parity (9, 10)

Stripe 9

Stripe 10

Parity (N, N+1)

Stripe N

Stripe N+1

Physical Disk 1

2

4

5

6

3

...

Parity (3, 4)

Striping Size

This method, based on RAID0, slices data sent from the host and distributes the slices into
multiple sets of RAID5 physical disks.
Since RAID50 distributes data to multiple sets of RAID5 disks, it enables further concurrent
processing and provides quicker access.

y Concurrent processing for multiple R/W commands
y Quick access

y If one of the physical disks constituting logical disks fails, performance in read operation
lowers.

19

Appendix C RAID

C
C..22 L
Liisstt o
off R
RA
AN
NK
K--C
Co
on
nffiig
gu
urraab
bllee R
RA
AIID
D
T
Tyyp
peess
The table below shows the number of physical disks and the number of RANKs available by the RAID
type on the 100/1000/2000 series (not including S400/S1400/S2400).
Number of Physical Disks
Disk Array

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

100/1000/2000
series

{

-

{

-

{

-

-

-

-

{

-

-

-

-

{

-

{

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

RAID5

-

-

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

RAID10

-

-

-

{

-

{

-

{

-

{

-

{

-

{

-

RAID
Type
RAID0
RAID1

{:

Available -:

Unavailable

C
C..33 L
Liisstt o
off P
Po
oo
oll--C
Co
on
nffiig
gu
urraab
bllee R
RA
AIID
D
T
Tyyp
peess
The tables below show the number of physical disks and the number of pools available by the RAID
type on S400/S1400/S2400/S2800.
y Basic pool
Disk Array

RAID Type

Number of Physical Disks
2

4

5

8

10

16

20

{

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

{

-

-

-

-

RAID10

-

{

-

{

-

{

-

RAID50

-

-

-

-

{

-

{

S400/S1400/
S2400/S2800

RAID1
RAID5

{:

Available -:

Unavailable

y Dynamic pool
RAID Type
RAID6 (4+PQ)

Disk Array

Number of Physical Disks

S400/S1400/

6 to 60

S2400/S2800

(120 or 240)*1

RAID6 (8+PQ)

10 to 60
(120 or 240)*1

*1:

The maximum number of physical disks is 60 when pools are in use.
To use 61 or more physical disks, you need to add physical disks by extending dynamic pools.

20

Appendix D

Notes on Use for Data Replication

Appendix D Notes on Use for Data
Replication
D
D..11 N
No
otteess o
on
nB
Biin
nd
diin
ng
gL
Lo
og
giiccaall D
Diisskkss
(1) S400/S1400/S2400/S2800
S400/S1400/S2400/S2800 disk array allows the user or the system engineer to bind logical disks.
1. Specify the capacity of one logical disk in units of 1 GB*1.
2. Now you can select a recommended capacity (already used in the 3000/4000 series disk array)
from a pull-down list.
The table below shows the recommended capacities.

(A logical disk’s capacity smaller than

0.1 GB*1 is shown rounded*2 on the configuration setting summary display.):
View on iSM

Logical disk capacity (including control region)

2.0 GB

2128 MB

4.1 GB

4256 MB

8.3 GB

8512 MB

16.6 GB

17024 MB

33.2 GB

34048 MB

66.4 GB

68096 MB

132.9 GB

136190 MB

162.0 GB

165984 MB

265.9 GB

272384 MB

531.9 GB

544768 MB

1063.9 GB

1089536 MB

3. On S400/S1400/S2400/S2800 disk array, you can bind logical disks of the same capacity
regardless of pool type and RAID configuration. (On the 100/1000/2000 series disk array
(not including S400/S1400/S2400), capacities of logical disks you can use are different
depending on the RAID configuration.)
4. The real capacity of each logical disk includes additional 2 MB region for disk control, which
makes it available for the user. On S400/S1400/S2400/S2800, binding a pool may cause the
capacity assigned to a pool (pool used capacity) to exceed the capacity of the logical disks.
*1: iSM handles 1024 KB as 1 MB.

21

Appendix D

Notes on Use for Data Replication

*2: When the total capacity of logical disks is less than 0.1 GB, it is represented as 0.1 GB.

(2) S series (not including S400/S1400/S2400/S2800 and 3000/4000 series)
The user or the system engineer can bind logical disks of the disk arrays (except for
S400/S1400/S2400/S2800 and 3000/4000 series).

The capacities of logical disks to be bound

vary depending on the RAID configuration.
If you want to bind logical disks which are to be used with DataReplication, the disks to be paired
must have the same capacity. If having purchased or planning to purchase the products such as
DataReplication, keep in mind that the following assists in easily updating the system
configuration later:
y

Binding logical disks having the same capacity

y

Selecting RAID configuration in which logical disks having the same capacity are easy to be
bound

iSM can also bind logical disks through the CLI (Command Line Interface).

However use of

GUI is recommended. This appendix mainly explains how to bind logical disks through the GUI.
If use of DataReplication is not for binding logical disks, read the description of “RV”*1 as
“logical disks having the same capacity” in the explanation below.
A logical disk’s capacity smaller than 0.1GB*2 is shown rounded on the configuration setting
summary display*3.

Note that different capacities may appear to be identical.

*1: RV (Replication Volume) is a copy volume in using DataReplication.
*2: iSM processes data with 1MB = 1024KB.
*3: When the total capacity of logical disks is less than 0.1 GB, it is represented as 0.1 GB.

22

Appendix D

Notes on Use for Data Replication

D
D..22 R
Reecco
om
mm
meen
nd
deed
dR
RA
AIID
D
C
on
nffiig
gu
urraattiio
on
n
Co
Table D-1 shows RAID configurations recommended if you want to get logical disks to have the same
capacity when using DataReplication.
Table D-1
RV
MV

Recommended Combinations of RAID Configurations
RAID1

RAID5

RAID5

RAID5

RAID5

*1

*1

*1

*1

(2+P)*2

(1+1)

(4+P)

(6+P)

(8+P)

~

~

−

~

~

~

~

−

~

~

RAID5(6+P)

−

−

~

−

−

RAID5(8+P)

~

~

−

~

~

~

~

−

~

~

RAID1(1+1)
*1

RAID5(4+P)

RAID5(2+P)

*2

*1: Can be specified through both Batch Setting and Individual Setting.
*2: Can be specified through only Individual Setting.

[How to read the table]
The table shows RAID configurations in which RV having the same capacity as for MV can be
bound.

The symbols in the table are as follows:

~: RV can be bound.
−:

RV (= a logical disk having the same capacity as for MV) may not be bound if the RAID
configurations of RV and MV are different.

[Supplementary information]
If operating logical disks in a configuration other than the above, bind the logical disks in
combination of RAIDs in which RV can be bound. Refer to D.3 “Capacity Except Recommended
RAID Configuration” for details.

23

Appendix D

Notes on Use for Data Replication

D
D..33 C
Caap
paacciittyy E
Exxcceep
ptt R
Reecco
om
mm
meen
nd
deed
d
R
Co
on
nffiig
gu
urraattiio
on
n
RA
AIID
DC
D
D..33..11 C
Coonncceepptt ooff LLooggiiccaall D
Diisskk B
Biinndd
C
Caappaacciittyy
This section explains disk array specifications and software specifications, according to which the
capacities of logical disks of this disk array series are to be determined.

The section mainly explains

the capacities of logical disks which are to be bound in a non-recommended RAID configuration. Use
“Individual Setting” of Configuration Setting (GUI) to bind logical disks in a non-recommended RAID
configuration.
(1)

Disk array specifications
This disk array series requires that the capacity of a logical disk of the RAID type (RAID0,
RAID10, or RAID5) using the striping feature is a multiple of “striping size × number of data
disks*”.

The striping size for of this disk array series is defined as 128KB. Thus, “128KB × number of
data disks” is the capacity unit of logical disks to be bound, as shown in Figure D-1.

128KB x Number
of Data Disks

Physical Disks
Figure D-1

Capacity Unit in Binding

*: A data disk is a physical disk, which is used to save data in RAID configuration. The
number of data disks is 1 in configuration of RAID1(1+1); it is 4 in configuration of
RAID5(4+P).

In other words, if a RAID configuration is expressed as RAID5(n+P) or

RAID10(n+n), “n” is equal to the number of data disks.

24

Appendix D

(2)

Notes on Use for Data Replication

Specifications common to Configuration Settings (GUI and CLI)
Configuration Settings (GUI and CLI) process logical disk capacities in megabytes.

According

to “(1) Disk array specifications” and common specifications in combination, the capacity unit of
logical disks to be bound is the lowest common multiple of “128KB × number of data disks” and
“1MB (= 1024KB)” as shown in Table D-2.
Table D-2

Capacity Unit of Logical Disks to be Bound

Number of Data Disks

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Capacity Unit (MB)

1

3

1

5

3

7

1

9

5

11

3

13

7

15

If RAID such as RAID1, which does not use the striping feature, is in use, data is processed in
megabytes.

Thus, the capacity unit is “1”.

If a capacity is specified, the system recognizes it as

the capacity that the user can use. In this case, logical disks are bound in the specified capacity
+ 2MB (disk management area).

(3)

Specifications specific to Configuration Setting (GUI)
Configuration Setting (GUI) specifies a capacity in units of 0.1GB.
with 0.1GB = 1024MB/10.

The capacity is calculated

In this case, obtain the capacity as follows:

y With Capacity Specification (Individual Setting):
Specified capacity × 1024 → (Decimal places rounded up)*1 → (+2MB)*2 → (Alignment)*3 →
Capacity of LD to be bound

y With Disk Count Specification (Individual Setting):
Free space in RANK/specified number of data disks → (Decimal places rounded up) →
(Alignment)*3 → Capacity of LD to be bound

*1: The value with decimal places being rounded up ensures that the specified capacity is
allocated from the free space in a selected RANK.

If the RANK does not contain free

space large enough, logical disks cannot be bound.
*2: A disk management area is added.
*3: Alignment means obtaining a multiple (an outer value for Capacity Specification, and an
inner value for Disk Count Specification) of the capacity (in megabytes) calculated from
Table D-2.

25

Appendix D

(4)

Notes on Use for Data Replication

Examples of obtaining capacities of LD to be bound through Individual Setting of Configuration
Setting (GUI)
The following are examples of capacities obtained by specifying a capacity or the number of data
disks when logical disks are bound. Refer to D.3.3 “Method of Specifying Configuration
Setting” for details on “Capacity Specification” and “Disk Count Specification”.

Examples 1:

Binding with Capacity Specification

1. Capacity obtained when logical disks are bound with 1.1GB specified for RAID5 (4+P):
1.1GB × 1024 = 1126.4MB → (Decimal place rounded up) → 1127MB → (+2MB)*1 →
1129MB → (Alignment) → 1129MB
2. Capacity obtained when logical disks are bound with 1.1GB specified for RAID5 (3+P):
1.1GB × 1024 = 1126.4MB → (Decimal place rounded up) → 1127MB → (+2MB)*1 →
1129MB → (Alignment) → 1131MB

*1: Logical disks are bound in the user-specified capacity + 2MB as the disk array
management area.

Examples 2:
1.

Binding with Disk Count Specification

Capacity obtained when three logical disks are bound with 266.7GB as the capacity of
RAID5 (4+P):
266.7GB × 1024/3 = 91033.6MB → (Decimal place rounded down) → 91033MB →
(Alignment)*1 → 91033MB*2

2.

Capacity obtained when three logical disks are bound with 200GB as the capacity of
RAID5 (3+P):
200GB × 1024/3 = 68266.66MB → (Decimal places rounded down) → 68266MB →
(Alignment)*1 → 68265MB*2

*1: The capacity unit is aligned according to Table D-2.

In RAID5, (13+P) is the

greatest, and the maximum value (MB as the capacity unit) is 13MB.
*2: The capacity of the bound logical disks includes 2MB as the disk array management
area.

26

Appendix D

Notes on Use for Data Replication

Note that the logical disk capacity displayed by the iSM is that available to the
user, not the total capacity including the disk array management area.

27

Appendix D

Notes on Use for Data Replication

D
D..33..22 D
Deettaaiilleedd C
Coom
mbbiinnaattiioonn ooff R
RA
AIID
D
C
Coonnffiigguurraattiioonn
This disk array series defines that the capacity unit of logical disks to be bound depends on the RAID
configuration. Therefore, RV may not be bound in RAID configuration different from that of MV.
Table D-3 shows the combinations of RAID configurations in which RV having the same capacity as
for MV can be bound.

Number of MV Data Disks

Table D-3 Correspondence between the Numbers of MV and RV Data Disks in Each RAID Configuration
Number of RV Data Disks*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14
15
1
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
~ ~
~
~
2
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
~ ~
~
~
3
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
{ { ~ {
~
{
~
4
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
~ ~
~
~
5
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
{ {
{ ~
{
~
6
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
{ { ~ {
~
{
~
7
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
{ {
{
~ {
~
8
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
~ ~
~
~
9
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
{ { { {
{
{ ~
{
10
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
{ {
{ ~
{
~
11
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
{ {
{
{
~
12
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
{ { ~ {
~
{
~
13
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
{ {
{
{
~
14
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
{ {
{
~ {
~
15
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
{ { { { ~ {
{
{
{
~
*: The number of data disks is the number of physical disks, which are used to save data in RAID
configuration. The number of data disks is 1 in configuration of RAID1(1+1); it is 4 in
configuration of RAID5(4+P).

In other words, if RAID is expressed as RAID0(n), RAID5(n+P),

or RAID10(n+n), “n” is equal to the number of data disks shown in Table D-3.

[How to read the table]
The table shows RAID configurations (depending on the number of data disks in actual operation) in
which RV having the same capacity as for MV can be bound.

The symbols in the table are as follows:

~: RV can be bound.
{: Configuration Setting (GUI) may be unable to bind RV depending on the MV capacity. In this
case, use Configuration Setting (CLI) to bind RV.
∆: Both Configuration Setting (GUI) and Configuration Setting (CLI) may be unable to bind RV
depending on the MV capacity.
Examples:
1.

With MV bound in configuration of RAID5(4+P)
Configuration Setting (GUI) can bind RV in configuration of RAID1, RAID5(2+P, 4+P, 8+P),
RAID10(2+2, 4+4), or RAID0(1).

2.

With MV bound in configuration of RAID5(6+P)
Configuration Setting (GUI) can bind RV in configuration of RAID0(3), RAID5(3+P, 6+P,
12+P), or RAID10(3+3, 6+6). Configuration Setting (CLI) can bind RV in configuration of
RAID1, RAID5(2+P, 4+P, 8+P), or RAID10(2+2, 4+4).

28

Appendix D

Notes on Use for Data Replication

D
D..33..33 M
Meetthhoodd ooff S
Sppeecciiffyyiinngg C
Coonnffiigguurraattiioonn
S
Seettttiinngg
There are two methods (Batch Setting and Individual Setting) for binding logical disks through
Configuration Setting (GUI). Each method includes another three specification methods “Disk Count
Specification”, “Capacity Specification”, and “Disk Count and Capacity Specification”. There are six
specification methods in total.
As a rule, bind RV by the same specification method as when binding MV.

Table D-4 shows the

combinations of specification methods.
Table D-4
RV
MV

Batch
Setting

Individual
Setting

Disk Count
Specification
Capacity
Specification
Disk Count
and Capacity
Specification
Disk Count
Specification
Capacity
Specification
Disk Count
and Capacity
Specification

Combinations of Specification Methods

Disk Count
Specification

Batch Setting
Capacity
Specification

{

Individual Setting
Capacity
Disk Count
Specification
and Capacity
Specification

Disk Count
and Capacity
Specification

Disk Count
Specification

×

×

×

×

×

×

{

{

×

{

{

×

{

{

×

{

{

×

×

×

{

×

×

×

{

{

×

{

{

×

{

{

×

{

{

[How to read the table]
The table shows the combinations of specification methods that can bind RV having the same capacity
as for MV.

The symbols in the table are as follows:

{:

RV can be bound.

×:

RV cannot be bound.

If there is difference between capacities obtained by the combinations of specification methods in Table
D-4, the capacity of a logical disk varies depending on the specification method. Table D-5 shows the
capacities of bound logical disks for each specification method.

29

Appendix D

Notes on Use for Data Replication

Table D-5
Setting
Method

Bound LD Capacity by Specification Method

Specification Method

How to Obtain Capacity

Disk Count Specification
Batch
Setting

Individual
Setting

Capacity Specification*1
Disk Count and Capacity Specification*1
Disk Count Specification
Capacity Specification*1
Disk Count and Capacity Specification*1

Divide the recommended maximum
capacity*2, which is within the RANK
capacity, by the number of data disks.
Specified capacity
Specified capacity
Divide the RANK capacity by the number of
data disks.
Specified capacity
Specified capacity

Capacity
Unit
1MB
0.1GB*3
0.1GB*3
1MB
0.1GB*3
0.1GB*3

*1: For “Disk Count and Capacity Specification”, Capacity has a higher priority than Disk Count.
Thus, the capacity of the bound logical disk is the same as when it is obtained by “Capacity
Specification”.
*2: Recommended capacity = 2128MB × n (n = 1, 2, 3, ...)
If the RANK capacity is 266.7GB (= 273100.8MB), the recommended capacity is 2128MB × 128 =
272384MB.
*3: A capacity must be specified in units of 0.1GB (0.1GB = 1024MB/10).
Examples 1:
1.

Binding with Capacity Specification

Capacity obtained when logical disks are bound with 1.1GB specified for RAID5 (4+P):
Both Batch Setting and Individual Setting can bind logical disks of the same capacity.
1.1GB × 1024 = 1126.4MB → (Decimal place rounded up) → 1127MB → (+2MB)* →
1129MB → (Alignment) → 1129MB

2.

Capacity obtained when logical disks are bound with 1.1GB specified for RAID5 (3+P):
Only Individual Setting can bind logical disks in configuration of RAID5 (3+P).
1.1GB × 1024 = 1126.4MB → (Decimal place rounded up) → 1127MB → (+2MB)* →
1129MB → (Alignment) → 1131MB

*: Logical disks are bound in the user-specified capacity + 2MB as the disk array management area.
Examples 2:
1.

Binding with Disk Count Specification

Capacity obtained when three logical disks are bound with 266.7GB as the RANK capacity of
RAID5 (4+P): Batch Setting and Individual Setting bind the logical disks of different capacities.
(With Batch Setting)
266.7GB × 1024 = 273100.8MB > 2128MB×n → 2128MB×128 → 272384MB →
272384MB/3 = 90794.66MB → (Decimal places rounded down) → 90794MB → (Alignment)
→ 90794MB*
(With Individual Setting)
266.7GB × 1024/3 = 91033.6MB → (Decimal place rounded down) → 91033MB →
(Alignment) → 91033MB*

30

Appendix D

2.

Notes on Use for Data Replication

Capacity obtained when three logical disks are bound with 200GB as the capacity of RAID5
(3+P): Only Individual Setting can bind logical disks in configuration of RAID5 (3+P).
200GB × 1024/3 = 68266.66MB → (Decimal places rounded down) → 68266MB →
(Alignment) →68265MB*
*: The capacity of the bound logical disks includes 2MB as the disk array management area.

Examples 3)
1.

Binding with Disk Count and Capacity Specification

Capacity obtained when logical disks are bound with 1.1GB specified for RAID5 (4+P):
Both Batch Setting and Individual Setting can bind three logical disks of the same capacity.
1.1GB × 1024 = 1126.4MB → (Decimal place rounded up) → 1127MB → (+2MB)* →
1129MB → (Alignment) → 1129MB

2.

Capacity obtained when logical disks are bound with 1.1GB specified for RAID5 (3+P):
Only Individual Setting can bind logical disks in configuration of RAID5 (3+P). Three logical
disks of the same capacity can be bound.
1.1GB × 1024 = 1126.4MB → (Decimal place rounded up) → 1127MB → (+2MB)* →
1129MB → (Alignment) → 1131MB
*: Logical disks are bound in the user-specified capacity + 2MB as the disk array management
area.

31

Appendix E

Logical Disk Used Capacity

Appendix E

Logical Disk Used Capacity

The list below shows the difference between the pool used capacity and the logical disk capacity on the
100/1000/2000 series disk array (not including S400/S1400/S2400):
Disk Array Series Name

Logical Disk Capacity

Pool/RANK Used Capacity

100/1000/2000

User available capacity + 2 MB + α

Equal to disk capacity

400/1400/2400/2800

User available capacity + 2 MB

Specified capacity + 2 MB + α

The relation (formula for calculating the relation) between the pool used capacity and the associated logical disk
capacity depends on the pool type:
1.

Dynamic pool
The minimum unit of assigning an area in a dynamic pool is 256 MB, and the 2-MB control
region is secured in another place.

Therefore, when the number of disks is 128 or less, the

amount of the control region secured in the pool is 256 MB, and when the number of disks is
between 129 and 256, it is 512 MB.
(1)

Formula
Use the following formula to calculate the pool used capacity when the capacity of logical disks
(user available capacity) required is X (MB) and the number of logical disks is Y:
Pool used capacity = ([(X - 1)/256] + 1) × 256 × Y + ([(Y - 1)/128] + 1) × 256
(X,Y > 0)
[X] is a gaussian which represents an integer below X.

(2)

Examples
When you bind one 2.0-GB logical disk, the pool used capacity required is:
([(2048 - 1)/256] + 1) × 256 × 1 + ([(1 - 1)/128] + 1) × 256 = 2048 + 256 = 2304 MB
When you bind one logical disk with the recommended capacity 2.0 GB, the pool used capacity
required is:
([(2126 - 1)/256] + 1) × 256 × 1 + ([(1 - 1)/128] + 1) × 256 = 2304 + 256 = 2560 MB

32

Appendix E

(3)

List of samples
No. of Logical Disks

(4)

Logical Disk Used Capacity

Capacity

Pool Used Capacity

1

2.0 GB

2.25 GB (2.2 GB on iSM)

129

2.0 GB

258.50 GB (258.5 GB on iSM)

1

Recommended capacity 2.0 GB

2.50 GB (2.5 GB on iSM)

129

Recommended capacity 2.0 GB

290.75 GB (290.7 GB on iSM)

Supplementary explanation
For the capacity of logical disks you can bind in unused space, it depends on how many logical
disks are in the pool.
For example, when you bind 127 logical disks and if there is a pool whose unused space is 2.0 GB,
you can locate one 2.0-GB logical disk in the pool, but you cannot locate two 1.0-GB logical
disks; because the control region already assigned is used for the 128 logical disks, but a 256-MB
new control region is required for 129-th and later logical disks.

2.

Basic pool
A basic pool consists of multiple partitions in a RAID configuration, and the partitions are
assigned by units of 1 MB. Therefore, because the partitions need to be equally used on area
assignment to logical disks, the capacity occupied is a multiple of the number of partitions
multiplied by 1 MB.

(1)

RAID1

-

1 partition

RAID5

-

1 partition

RAID10 (4 PDs)

- 2 partitions

RAID10 (8 PDs)

- 4 partitions

RAID10 (16 PDs)

- 8 partitions

RAID50 (10 PDs)

- 2 partitions

RAID50 (20 PDs)

- 4 partitions

Formula
Use the following formula to calculate the pool used capacity when the logical disk capacity (user
available capacity) required is X (MB) and the number of RAID partitions is N:
Y = (X + 2) mod N
When Y = 0,
Pool used capacity = X + 2

33

Appendix E

Logical Disk Used Capacity

When Y > 0,
Pool used capacity = X + 2 + N - Y
A mode N is a congruence representing the remainder of A divided by N.
(2)

Examples
When you bind 1.0-GB logical disks with RAID10 (16 PDs):
Y = (1024 + 2) mod 8 = 2
Pool used capacity = 1024 + 2 + 8 - 2 = 1032 MB
When you bind 1.0-GB logical disks with RAID10 (8 PDs):
Y = (1024 + 2) mod 4 = 2
Pool used capacity = 1024 + 2 + 4 - 2 = 1028 MB
When you bind 1.0-GB logical disks with RAID5 (10 PDs):
Y = (1024 + 2) mod 2 = 0
Pool used capacity = 1024 + 2 = 1026 MB
Note that the logical disk capacity is the same in the respective cases but the pool used capacity is
not.

34

Appendix F

Appendix F

Batch Setup File

Batch Setup File

F
F..11 N
Niicckkn
naam
mee S
Seettttiin
ng
gF
Fiillee
You can collectively set nicknames using the nickname setting file. The following shows the format
of the nickname setting file and a setting sample.
(a) Formatting the user definition file
The format for batch setting the disk array name, LD type/name and the port name from the user
definition file is described below.
The user definition file contains a line starting with “#” or “;” to be handled as a comment line.
[User definition file format for batch setup]
# Comment line
rmon name list
(A)
[array]
(B)
Target disk array name and new disk array name
[ld]
(E)
nnnnh, new LD type and new LD name
(F)
:
[port]
(G)
mmh-ssh, and new port name
(H)
:
[array]
(B)
:

(C), (D)

(A) Key information (File identification info)
Describes “rmon name list” as the key information indicating that the following parameter is
the name setting file.
(B) Key information (Disk array)
Describes key information for specifying the name of the target disk array. The
information following the [array] key is valid for the disk array name specified by the [array]
key until the next [array] key appears.
Only one disk array name can be set by using one [array] key. To set multiple disk array
names, an [array] key is required for each disk array name.

If multiple disk array names

are specified by using one [array] key, only the first disk array name is valid.
When an invalid disk array name is specified, the settings are invalid until the next [array]

35

Appendix F

Batch Setup File

key.
(C) Target disk array Name
Describes the disk array name (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) targeted by the following
parameter, to continue from the key information [array].
(D) New disk array Name
Describes the disk array name to set following the target disk array + ‘, (comma)’ when
executing the disk array name setting.

It is unnecessary to specify this when the disk array

name is not to be set (i.e., when changing only the LD type/name or the port name).
Describing a name in excess of 32 characters for the disk array name will end in error.
(E) Key information (LD)
Describes [ld] as the key information indicating that the following parameter is the setup
information for LDs.

(The information following [ld] is valid until the next [array] or [ld]

appears.)
(F) New LD Type/Name
Sets the format and LD names for the LDs in the target disk array ((c) above) described
before describing this parameter.

Describes “nnnnh (nnnn: LD number in four

hexadecimal digits)” as the ID information of the target LDs.

Describes the newly set

format (refer to Table 15-1), “, (comma)” and LD name to continue from “, (comma)”.
Describing a name in excess of 24 characters for the LD name will end in error.
When making settings for other LDs in the same disk array, describe the information to be
set in the same format on the succeeding line.

On the ACOS-4 system, make sure that the LD identifier name matches the LD name on the host.

(G) Key information (port)
Describes [port] as the key information indicating that the following parameter is the setup
information related to ports.

(The information following [port] is valid until [array] or [ld]

appears.)

36

Appendix F

Batch Setup File

(H) New Port Name
Sets the names for the ports in the target disk array ((C) above) described before describing
this parameter. Describes “mmh-ssh (mm: director number in two hexadecimal digits; ss:
port number in two hexadecimal digits)” as the ID information of the ports.

Describes the

newly set port name to continue from “, (comma)”.
Describing a name in excess of 32 characters for the new port name will end in error.
When making settings for other ports in the same disk array, describe the information to be
set in the same format on the succeeding line.
[An example of the user definition file for batch setting in initial introduction]
rmon name list
[array]
3000000000000003,Array001

[ld]
0000h,WN,DBmaster001

Set the disk array name of
3000000000000003 to Array001.
The following indicate the name
settings for this disk array.
Set the format of the LD number
0000h to WN, and the LD name to
DBmaster001.
The same applies to the following.

0001h,WN,DBmaster002
0002h,NX,DBmaster003
0003h,NX,DBmaster004
0004h,NX,DBmaster005
0005h,WN,DBmaster006
0006h,WN,DBmaster007
0007h,NX,DBmaster008
[port]
04h-00h,DBServer01

Set the port name of the port
number 04-001 to DBServer01.
The same applies to the following.

04h-01h,DBServer02
06h-00h,DBServer03
06h-01h,DBServer04

37

Appendix F

Batch Setup File

[An example of the user definition file for batch setting after start of operation]

rmon name list
[array]
Array001
[ld]
0000h,WN,DBtest001

Indicates that the disk array to be set
is Array001.
Set the format of the LD number to 0000h
to WN, and the LD name to DBtest001.
The same applies to the following.

0011h,NX,DBtest002

38

Appendix F

Batch Setup File

F
F..22 P
Paaiirr S
Seettttiin
ng
gF
Fiillee
A pair setting file enables you to pair logical disks collectively and register AT-groups collectively.
The following shows the format of the pair setting file and a setting sample.

(1) Pair setting file format
(1)

A pair setting file is a text file (*.txt, *.csv) in ASCII character format.

(2)

Data from a semicolon (;) or sharp (#) to the end of the line is processed as comments.

(3)

Uppercase and lowercase characters are distinguished.

(4)

Write “Pair Name List” in the first line except comment lines.

(5)

In the lines following “Pair Name List”, specify the items for pair setting in the format

Be careful in writing characters.

below.
“MV DiskArrayName”,“MV Vol Type”,“MV Vol Name”,[“RV DiskArrayName”],“RV
Vol Type”,“RV Vol Name”[,]
(Items enclosed in brackets [] can be omitted.)

MV DiskArrayName
y Specify the name of the disk array to which Master Volume (MV) belongs.
y The disk array name can be specified with up to 32 characters.
MV Vol Type
y Specify the type of Master Volume.
MV Vol Name
y Specify the logical disk name of Master Volume.
y The logical disk name can be specified with up to 24 characters.
RV DiskArrayName
y Specify the name of the disk array to which Replication Volume (RV) belongs.
y The disk array name can be specified with up to 32 characters.
y If omitted, the system assumes that RV belongs to the disk array of MV.
RV Vol Type
y Specify the type of Replication Volume.
RV Vol Name
y Specify the logical disk name of Replication Volume.
y The logical disk name can be specified with up to 24 characters.
(6)

To create an AT-group, write “[atcreate]”.

(7)

Specify the [atcreate] items in the following format:
“ATgroupName”,”DiskArrayName”

ATgroupName
y Specify the name of the AT-group to be created.
y The At-group name can be specified with up to 32 characters.

39

Appendix F

Batch Setup File

DiskArrayName
y Specify the name of the disk array in which the AT-group is created.
y The disk array name can be specified with up to 32 characters.
(8)

To register volumes to the AT-group created, write “[atadd]”.

(9)

Specify the [atadd] items in the following format:
“ATgroupName”, “MV Vol Type”, “MV Vol Name”

ATgroupName
y Specify the name of the AT-group to which the volume is created.
y The AT-group name can be specified with up to 32 characters.
MV Vol Type
y Specify the format of the master volume to be registered.
MV Vol Name
y Specify the logical disk name of the master volume to be registered.
y The logical disk name can be specified with up to 24 characters.

(10) To delete volumes already registered to an AT-group, write “[atremove]”.
(11) Specify the [atremove] items in the same manner as [atadd].
“ATgroupName”, “MV Vol Type”, “MV Vol Name”
(12) To delete an AT-group, write “[atdelete]”.
(13) Specify the [atdelete] items in the following format:
“ATgroupName”

ATgroupName
y Specify the name of the AT-group be deleted.
y The AT-group name can be specified with up to 32 characters.

40

Appendix F

Batch Setup File

(2) Pair setting sample
Pair Name List
...(a)
;MV DiskArrayName,MV Vol Type,MV Vol. Name,RV DiskArrayName,RV Vol
Type,RV VolName
...(b)
#MV DiskArrayName,MV Vol Type,MV Vol. Name,RV DiskArrayName,RV Vol
Type,RV VolName
...(b)
DiskArrayName1,NX,DEV001, DiskArrayName1,NX,DEV101
...(c)
DiskArrayName1,NX,DEV001, DiskArrayName2,NX,DEV202
...(c)
DiskArrayName1,NX,DEV002, DiskArrayName2,NX,DEV203
DiskArrayName1,NX,DEV003, DiskArrayName3,NX,DEV301
DiskArrayName1,NX,DEV004, DiskArrayName3,NX,DEV302
DiskArrayName1,NX,DEV011,,NX,DEV021
...(d)
[atcreate]
...(e)
#ATgroupName,DiskArrayName
...(b)
DB_atg1,DiskArrayName1
...(f)
[atadd]
...(g)
#ATgroupName,OSType,ExVolName
...(b)
DB_atg1,NX,DEV001
...(h)
DB_atg1,NX,DEV002
...(h)
[atcreate]
...(e)
#ATgroupName,DiskArrayName
...(b)
DB_atg2,DiskArrayName1
...(f)
[atadd]
...(g)
#ATgroupName,OSType,ExVolName
...(b)
DB_atg2,NX,DEV003
...(h)
DB_atg2,NX,DEV004
...(h)
Pair Name List
...(a)
[atremove]
...(i)
#ATgroupName,OSType,ExVolName
...(b)
DB_atg1,NX,DEV001
...(j)
DB_atg1,NX,DEV002
...(j)
[atdelete]
...(k)
#ATgroupName
...(b)
DB_atg1
...(l)
[atremove]
...(i)
#ATgroupName,OSType,ExVolName
...(b)
DB_atg2,NX,DEV003
...(j)
DB_atg2,NX,DEV004
...(j)
[atdelete]
...(k)
#ATgroupName
...(b)
DB_atg2
...(l)

41

Appendix F

Batch Setup File


(a)

If the first line except the comment line does not contain this character string, an error
(“[05254] It is not a file for Batch Setting.”) is posted.

(b)

A line starting with a semicolon (;) or sharp (#) in a CSV-format text file is processed as a
comment line. Use a comment line mainly as the title of an item.

(c)

If pairing a single MV with multiple RVs, create a line for each pair.

(d)

If the disk array name of RV is omitted, the system assumes that the RV belongs to the disk
array of the MV.

(e)

Declare creation of an AT-group.

(f)

Create an AT-group on the specified disk array.

(g)

Declare registration of volumes to the AT-group.

(h)

Each specified volume must be a PV (Primary Volume) and set for one RDR pair. In
addition, when you register multiple volumes to an AT-group, the volumes need to be
located on the same disk array. RDR pair volumes (RVs) set for registered volumes are
also need to be located on the same disk array.

(i)

Declare deletion of a volume from an AT-group.

(j)

Specify a volume registered to a specified AT-group.

(k)

Declare deletion of an AT-group.

(l)

Delete all volumes registered to the AT-group you are going to delete.

(1) Use a half-size space between characters.
(2) Do not enter a space preceding or following a character string.
(3) If the file does not begin with “Pair Name List”, except for comment lines, an error (“[05254] It
is not a file for Batch Setting.”) occurs.
(4) If a character string is preceded by a space or followed by a space, an error (“[05254] It is not a
file for Batch Setting.”) is posted.
(5) Any AT-group name that does not conform to the following rules is invalid:
y

Number of available characters

y

Available characters

1 to 32 characters

Alphabet:

A to Z (a to z)
* Upper- and lower-case characters are distinguished.

*

Numerals:

0 to 9

Underbar:

_

Slash:

/

All the characters must be 1-byte characters.

42

Appendix G

ACOS-4 Resource Operation Guard

Appendix G ACOS-4 Resource Operation
Guard

It is allowed only for our maintenance personnel to specify ACOS-4 resource settings.

If

you need to handle ACOS-4 resources, be sure to ask our maintenance personnel first.

To protect ACOS-4 against system destruction, the work involved in setting the resources used by ACOS-4 is
defined as tasks to be carried out by maintenance personnel.

On the other hand, the open system resources are

allowed to be set by general users, giving priority to the freedom of work in such cases as changing the settings.
Note, however, that a mistake or other inappropriate operation that the general user makes when setting the Access
Control in the WWN mode or in the GUI-based Port mode, which has been supported for the disk array which
applies program product “AccessControl” beginning with Version 2.1, can result in the destruction of the ACOS-4
system.
Starting with Version 2.2, a reinforced guard function has been deployed that guards against
Access-Control-related operation’s that can lead to the destruction of the ACOS-4 system.

Whenever an

operation related to the ACOS-4 resources is requested, a dialog appears indicating that the operations for the
ACOS-4 resources by general users are restricted and that a consultation with maintenance personnel is required.

Figure G-1

ACOS-4 Resource Operation Warning Dialog

43

Appendix G

ACOS-4 Resource Operation Guard

(1) ACOS-4 resources
(a) Logical disk of the “A4” type
(b) Port including any logical disk of the “A4” type
And all logical disks assigned to that port
(c) Port of the “A4” platform
And all logical disks assigned to that port
(d) LD Set including any port of the “A4” platform
And all logical disks and ports assigned to that LD Set
(e) LD Set of the “A4” platform
And all logical disks and ports assigned to that LD Set

(2) Operations related to the ACOS-4 resources
The operations related to the ACOS-4 resources are special, and general users are restricted from
performing them.

If any operation related to the ACOS-4 resources is required, consult

maintenance personnel.

44

Appendix G

ACOS-4 Resource Operation Guard

(3) Functions and operations subject to the ACOS-4 resource operation
guard
Table G-1 List of Functions and Operations Subject to the ACOS-4 Resource Operation Guard (1/2)
Function
Function Details
Guarded Operation
Configuration
setting

Access Control

Bind logical disk

Setting “A4” as the logical disk type

Set/change
logical disk type

Setting “A4” as the logical disk type

Set/change port
platform

Setting “A4” as the port platform.

Create/delete LD
Set

Creating an LD Set of the “A4” platform

Changing the logical disk type from “A4”
Changing the port platform type from “A4”
Deleting an LD Set of the “A4” platform
Deleting an LD Set including any port of the “A4”
platform

Change LD Set
name

Changing an LD Set of the “A4” platform

Add logical disk
to LD Set

Adding a logical disk of the “A4” type to an LD Set

Changing the platform of the LD Set including a port
of the “A4” platform
Adding a logical disk to an LD Set of the “A4”
platform
Adding a logical disk to an LD Set including a port
of the “A4” platform

Delete logical
disk from LD Set

Deleting a logical disk of the “A4” type from an LD
Set
Deleting a logical disk from an LD Set of the “A4”
platform
Deleting a logical disk from an LD Set including a
port of the “A4” platform

Connect WWPN
link to LD Set

Connecting a WWPN link to an LD Set of the “A4”
platform
Connecting a WWPN link to an LD Set including a
port of the “A4” platform

Disconnect
WWPN link from
LD Set

45

Disconnecting a WWPN link from an LD Set of the
“A4” platform
Disconnecting a WWPN link from an LD Set
including a port of the “A4” platform

Appendix G

ACOS-4 Resource Operation Guard

Table G-1 List of Functions and Operations Subject to the ACOS-4 Resource Operation Guard (2/2)
Function
Function Details
Guarded Operation
Access Control

Connect port link
to LD Set

Connecting a port link of the “A4” platform to an LD
Set
Connecting a port link to an LD Set of the “A4”
platform
Connecting a port link to an LD Set including a port
of the “A4” platform

Disconnect port
link from LD Set

Disconnecting a port link of the “A4” platform from
an LD Set
Disconnecting a port link from an LD Set of the “A4”
platform
Disconnecting a port link from an LD Set including a
port of the “A4” platform

Change port
mode

Changing the mode of a port of the “A4” platform
Changing the mode of a port assigned a logical disk
the “A4” type
Changing the mode of a port linked to an LD Set of
the “A4” platform

LD Administrator

Add logical disk
to LD Set

Adding a logical disk of the “A4” type to an LD Set
Adding a logical disk to an LD Set of the “A4”
platform
Adding a logical disk to an LD Set including a port of
the “A4” platform

Move logical
disk to preserve
group from LD
Set

Moving a logical disk of the “A4” type to a preserve
group from an LD Set
Moving a logical disk to a preserve group from an LD
Set of the “A4” platform
Moving a logical disk to a preserve group from an LD
Set including a port of the “A4” platform

Move logical
disk to reserve
group from LD
Set

Moving a logical disk of the “A4” type to a reserve
group from an LD Set
Moving a logical disk to a reserve group from an LD
Set of the “A4” platform
Moving a logical disk to a reserve group from an LD
Set including a port of the “A4” platform

Configuration
display/state
monitoring (iSM
client main
window)

Set/change
logical disk type

Setting “A4” as the logical disk type
Changing the logical disk type to “A4”
Setting/changing the type of a logical disk assigned to
a port of the “A4” platform
Changing the type of a logical disk assigned to an LD
Set of the “A4” platform

46

Index
BC .............................................................................. I-6
binding a pool ......................................IV-7, IV-8, IV-62
binding logical disk ..................................................III-7
binding logical disks................................... IV-35, IV-62
binding pool or RANK .............................................III-7
binding time........................................................... IV-50
binding/expanding pool or RANK............................III-5
business server................... I-35, I-37, I-38, I-39, IV-201

1
100 series.................................... I-3, I-5, I-10, I-14, I-15
1000 series.................................. I-3, I-5, I-10, I-14, I-15
2

C

2000 series.............................................. I-3, I-5, I-6, I-9
2800 series......................................I-2, I-5, I-6, I-8, I-11

cache memory........................................................... I-16
cache module ............................................................ I-16
cache partitioning function ............................................2
candidate LD list ................................................. IV-216
capacity ................................................................. IV-95
capacity expansion............... IV-2, IV-4, IV-108, IV-109
capacity of the logical disks.............IV-42, IV-70, IV-72
capacity unit disagreement ............IV-45, IV-73, IV-117
change format time ......................................... IV-3, IV-4
Change Format Time ........................................... IV-120
Change of Logical Disk Configuration.....................III-7
change ownership ..............................IV-3, IV-4, IV-117
change pool expansion time............................ IV-2, IV-4
change pool rebuild time ................................ IV-2, IV-4
change port mode ................................... IV-183, IV-220
change rebuild time ...........................IV-2, IV-4, IV-110
changing AccessControl configuration.. III-5, III-6, III-7
changing time to bind logical disks ....................... IV-60
clustered ................................................................... I-33
community name ................................................. IV-166
component ....................................I-2, I-3, I-4, I-16, I-17
configuration setting .................................................. II-2
configuration tree view.......................................... IV-92
control region ........................................................ 32, 33
control volume............................................ IV-35, IV-39
controller ...... I-3, I-4, I-6, I-16, IV-117, IV-129, IV-140
copy the network setup information .................... IV-168
creating LD Set................................ III-10, III-13, III-15
cross call...................... IV-117, IV-129, IV-140, IV-172
CSV format.......................................................... IV-175
CX ................................... IV-49, IV-76, IV-127, IV-186

3
3000 series..................................................... I-2, I-5, I-7
4
4000 series.............................................. I-2, I-4, I-6, I-7
A
A2.................................... IV-49, IV-76, IV-127, IV-186
A4..................................................IV-49, IV-76, IV-127
Access Control setting .................................... IV-3, IV-5
access management .................................................. I-37
AccessControl ........I-32, IV-28, IV-57, IV-107, IV-119,
IV-183, IV-207, IV-209, IV-221
AccessControl Installation......................................... II-2
accessible area .......................................................... I-32
accessible LD List ............................................... IV-209
ACOS-2 ........................... IV-49, IV-76, IV-127, IV-186
ACOS-4 .........................................IV-49, IV-76, IV-127
adapter card .............................................................. I-17
AIX.................................. IV-49, IV-76, IV-127, IV-186
all selection.......................................................... IV-219
alternative paths...................... I-11, I-12, I-13, I-14, I-15
array ............................................................................ 35
array group ................................................................. I-6
assigning logical disk ... III-10, III-13, III-15, IV-3, IV-5
auto assignment ................................................... IV-140
auto repair............................................................ IV-136
AX ................................... IV-49, IV-76, IV-127, IV-186

D
data replication ...........................III-4, III-6, III-9, IV-34
data replication function ...................................... IV-116
DE ....................................................................... IV-125
deassigning logical disk................................ III-8, III-15
deleting LD Set.......................................................III-15
detailed information view ...................................... IV-92
disk array ..................................................................III-3
disk array name ............... I-30, IV-154, IV-155, IV-156,
IV-158, IV-167, 35, 36, 37
disk array name setting ..................... IV-154, IV-156, 36
disk array subsystem information ........... IV-154, IV-156

B
back board ........................................................I-16, I-17
basic cabinet ................................................ I-2, I-6, I-16
basic pool ....... I-18, I-23, IV-7, IV-10, IV-92, IV-95, 33
batch binding ......................................................... IV-62
batch binding logical disks .................................... IV-62
battery....................................................................... I-16

47

disk arrays with pool ................................................ I-18
disk control region.....................IV-21, IV-40, IV-68, 21
disk director........................................................I-4, I-16
disk enclosure ....................................... I-2, I-3, I-4, I-17
display selection .................................................. IV-217
displaying segment state................................. IV-3, IV-5
double parity................................................................ 13
duplicated ................................................................. I-33
dynamic pool .. I-19, I-24, IV-7, IV-10, IV-64, IV-95, 32
DynamicDataReplication............................. I-2, I-3, I-16

J
junction box......................................................I-16, I-17
K
key information ..............................................IV-158, 35
L

E

large capacity....................................................... IV-125
LD ............................................................................... 36
LD Administrator Setting ............................... IV-3, IV-5
LD batch bind ...................................................... IV-128
LD batch binding................... IV-2, IV-4, IV-63, IV-122
LD bind ....... IV-3, IV-4, IV-34, IV-91, IV-121, IV-129,
IV-143
LD binding ......................................IV-35, IV-36, IV-93
LD capacity ................................................ IV-44, IV-80
LD individual bind ..............................IV-8, IV-9, IV-84
LD information display .................................. IV-3, IV-4
LD name ......... I-30, IV-117, IV-126, IV-158, 36, 37, 38
LD number ............................................................ IV-50
LD set ............. IV-187, IV-195, IV-201, IV-206, IV-210
LD setting ..........................................IV-3, IV-4, IV-116
LD type................................................................ IV-126
LD unbind .........................................IV-3, IV-4, IV-119
LD window.......................................................... IV-150
Level 1..................................................................... IV-6
Level 2..................................................................... IV-6
Level 3..................................................................... IV-6
license............................................................. IV-3, IV-5
linking LD Set and path.............................. III-10, III-13
Linux ............................... IV-49, IV-76, IV-127, IV-186
list view .................................................. IV-211, IV-216
logical configuration of a disk array ......................... I-18
logical disk .......... I-18, I-22, I-29, IV-7, IV-121, IV-123
logical disk batch setting ....................................... IV-62
logical disk bind .................................................III-5, 21
logical disk binding list screen .............................. IV-91
logical disk capacity expansion ...................... IV-3, IV-4
logical disk configuration screen ................ IV-94, IV-95
logical disk group ..................................................... I-37
logical disk name........................................ IV-48, IV-75
logical disk replication ............................................... I-3
logical disk tab ................................IV-92, IV-93, IV-97
logical disk unbind ......................................... III-7, III-8
LUN........................................................ IV-201, IV-211
LX ................................... IV-49, IV-76, IV-127, IV-186

EC............................................................................... I-6
excess of capacity ..........................IV-45, IV-73, IV-117
expand LUN ........................................................ IV-172
expanding a capcity of a pool ................................ IV-21
expanding capacity of logical disks ....................... IV-53
expansion method .................................................. IV-22
expansion time.......................................... IV-33, IV-109
extended cabinet .......................................... I-2, I-6, I-17
F
failure (nnh)......................................................... IV-159
fan.....................................................................I-16, I-17
file identification info .................................................. 35
format time .......................................................... IV-118
formatting the user definition file ................................ 35
free area list ........................................................... IV-38
freeing logical disk ......................................... IV-3, IV-5
G
get configuration information ......................... IV-3, IV-5
get disk array info......................IV-148, IV-152, IV-218
get log................................................IV-3, IV-5, IV-173
group ................................................................... IV-216
group number ............................................................. I-6
GUI........................................................................... I-21
H
HBA ................................................... I-35, I-37, IV-188
high reliability ........................................ IV-125, IV-129
high scalability ........................................................... I-2
host director........................................................I-4, I-16
HP-UX............................. IV-49, IV-76, IV-127, IV-186
huge capacity ....................................................... IV-125

M
I

maintenance.............................................................. I-16
manually repair.................................................... IV-136
mirroring.............................................................. IV-129
modem ...................................................................... I-16
multi-RANK configuration..............I-18, I-20, I-23, I-28

inaccessible area ....................................................... I-32
information about the pool .................................... IV-24
initialization of logical disk ............................ IV-3, IV-5
installation ...................................................... III-2, III-3
Installing the Access Control....................................III-4
iSM server ............................................................... IV-6

48

pool settings.................................................... IV-2, IV-4
pool tab....................................................... IV-92, IV-95
pool type..................................................... IV-17, IV-79
pool unbind..................................................... IV-2, IV-4
port ............. I-16, I-30, I-37, I-38, I-39, IV-138, IV-154,
IV-156, IV-157, IV-158, IV-216, 35, 36, 37
port mode....................... IV-28, IV-183, IV-210, IV-213
port name............ I-30, IV-154, IV-156, IV-157, IV-158,
35, 36, 37
position number .......................................................... I-6
power control card .................................................... I-16
power control part .................................................... I-16
power supply ....................................................I-16, I-17
preserve group ................................I-32, IV-216, IV-217
product information ................................ IV-220, IV-221
product use situation............................................ IV-221
purchase product classification............................ IV-221
purpose ................................................... IV-211, IV-216

N
NEC Storage 2800 .................................................... I-13
network setting ............................................... IV-3, IV-5
nickname ....................I-30, I-31, IV-34, IV-153, IV-158
nickname batch setting ................................... IV-2, IV-4
nickname setting............................................. IV-3, IV-5
number................................................................... IV-76
number of LDs.......... IV-41, IV-44, IV-69, IV-80, IV-96
number of logical disks ......................................... IV-72
number of PDs..................... IV-18, IV-23, IV-25, IV-96
number of pools...............................IV-64, IV-65, IV-79
number of RANKs............................................... IV-129
number of spares ................. IV-64, IV-66, IV-80, IV-87
number of unused .................................................. IV-80
NX ................................... IV-49, IV-76, IV-127, IV-186
O

R

only specify LD capacity ............................ IV-39, IV-67
only specify the number of LDs ................. IV-39, IV-67
OS Type...................................................... IV-48, IV-75
overview of Access Control...................................... I-32
overview of AccessControl.......................................III-2
ownership ............................................................ IV-129

RAID ............ I-29, IV-7, IV-62, IV-65, IV-102, IV-105,
IV-121, IV-123, IV-129, 4, 13, 17
RAID type .................................................. IV-17, IV-79
RAID0 ................................................... I-30, IV-102, 12
RAID1 .......... IV-7, IV-102, IV-121, IV-125, IV-129, 12
RAID10 ............................................................... IV-102
RAID5 ................ IV-7, IV-102, IV-121, IV-125, IV-129
RAID50 ................................................................... IV-7
RAID6 ........................................................ I-2, I-3, IV-7
RANK..............................................I-18, I-22, I-29, I-30
RANK bind........................................IV-2, IV-4, IV-185
RANK Bind ......................................................... IV-103
RANK information .............................................. IV-125
RANK information display............................. IV-2, IV-4
RANK type.......................................................... IV-129
RANK unbind................................................. IV-2, IV-4
RANK window .................................................... IV-145
RANK/spare Setting ....................................... IV-2, IV-4
rebuild start instruction....... IV-2, IV-4, IV-111, IV-112,
IV-136
rebuild time ..................... IV-17, IV-32, IV-105, IV-113
redundancy ................................................................. I-3
reference mode ........................................................ IV-5
RemoteDataReplication......................................I-2, I-16
renaming a logical disk.......................................... IV-58
renaming a pool ..................................................... IV-29
replicate logical disks ................................................. I-2
replication batch setting.................................. IV-2, IV-4
replication volume .................................................... I-32
rmon name list ............................................................. 35
RPL ........................................................ IV-211, IV-216

P
pair ......................................................... IV-123, IV-158
pair setting ............................III-4, III-6, III-9, IV-28, 39
panel ......................................................................... I-16
parameters ............................................................... IV-2
parity ........................................................................... 17
parity disk.............................................................I-2, I-3
PD........................................................................ IV-125
PD group ......................I-6, I-30, IV-34, IV-141, IV-149
PD group number ........ IV-124, IV-128, IV-144, IV-149
PD groups ............................................................ IV-124
physical disk .... I-4, I-6, I-17, I-18, I-21, I-22, I-29, I-30,
III-5, IV-7, IV-62, IV-102, IV-104, IV-105, IV-106,
IV-108, IV-110, IV-111, IV-112, IV-121, IV-123,
IV-125, IV-128, IV-129, IV-133, IV-136, IV-144,
IV-145, IV-146, IV-147, IV-149, 17, 19
physical disk information display ................... IV-2, IV-4
physical disk tab ..............................IV-92, IV-93, IV-99
physical disks ...................................................... IV-109
platform ............................................................... IV-186
platform setting .............................................. IV-3, IV-5
dynamic ................................................................. IV-92
pool......................................... I-17, I-18, I-22, I-29, I-30
Pool and RANK........................................................ I-22
pool bind..............................................IV-2, IV-4, IV-34
pool binding........................................................... IV-93
pool binding wizard ........................................ IV-8, IV-9
pool capacity ...................................IV-17, IV-65, IV-79
pool capacity expansion.................................. IV-2, IV-4
pool information ..............................IV-22, IV-32, IV-97
pool list.................................................................. IV-37
pool name ............................... I-30, IV-15, IV-17, IV-95
pool number........................................................... IV-17
pool occupied capacity .......................................... 21, 32

S
selecting a pool ...................................................... IV-37
selecting physical disks .............................. IV-13, IV-86
selecting the pool type ........................................... IV-10
selecting unused areas ........................................... IV-38
selection PD for expansion .................................... IV-23
serial number ....................................................... IV-154

49

set a pair ................................................................ IV-34
set pool name.................................................. IV-2, IV-4
setting access control........................................... IV-220
setting cache segment ..................................... IV-3, IV-5
setting disk array ....................................................III-10
setting of a service processor......................................... 7
setting port name .................................... IV-154, IV-156
setting spare......................................................... IV-125
setting the port access mode ............ III-10, III-11, III-14
setting/changing the link between LD Set and path
............................................................................III-15
Setting/Display Disk Array Network.............. IV-3, IV-5
Setting/Display Port Platform......................... IV-3, IV-5
Setting/Displaying Access Control ................. IV-3, IV-5
Setting/Displaying AccessControl .................. IV-3, IV-5
Setting/Displaying Auto Assignment ............. IV-3, IV-5
Setting/Displaying Cross Call ........................ IV-3, IV-5
Setting/Displaying Disk Array Name ............. IV-3, IV-5
Setting/Displaying Disk Array Time .............. IV-3, IV-5
Setting/Displaying of Performance Optimization
.................................................................... IV-3, IV-5
Setting/Displaying Port Name ........................ IV-3, IV-5
Setting/Displaying Spare Mode ...................... IV-3, IV-5
snapshot................................................................. IV-96
snapshot threshold capacity ................................... IV-96
snapshot used capacity .......................................... IV-96
Solaris.............................. IV-49, IV-76, IV-127, IV-186
space saving................................................................ I-3
spare ......... I-30, IV-34, IV-92, IV-112, IV-125, IV-128,
IV-129, IV-133, IV-134, IV-136, IV-143, IV-144,
IV-145, IV-147, IV-148, IV-172
Spare......................................................................... I-30
spare bind .............................. IV-2, IV-4, IV-34, IV-133
spare binding ...................................IV-84, IV-85, IV-93
spare list view...................................................... IV-100
spare unbind ......................................IV-2, IV-4, IV-134
spare unbinding ..................................................... IV-89
special setting ................................................. IV-3, IV-5
specifications ................................................................. 1
specify both the number of LDs and LD capacity
................................................................ IV-39, IV-67
specify existing LD ............................................... IV-42
Specify existing LD............................................... IV-70
specify expansion time .......................................... IV-23
specify LD capacity ............................................... IV-42
Specify LD capacity .............................................. IV-70
specify recommend LD capacity ........................... IV-42
Specify recommend LD capacity........................... IV-70
specifying the way of binding the logical disks
................................................................ IV-39, IV-67
standard .................................................. IV-125, IV-129
staring AccessControl.............................................III-10
start access control.................................. IV-208, IV-220
start LD number................................................... IV-117
start of the iSMnetconf command.................................. 4
Storage Manager.......................................................III-3

striping.........................I-18, I-23, IV-129, 12, 14, 16, 17
success................................................................. IV-158
success (already).................................................. IV-158
SVP .......................................................................... I-16
system configuration ................................................. II-2
T
temperature alarm .............................................I-16, I-17
termination of the iSMnetconf command ......................6
text....................................................................... IV-175
to pool.................................. IV-13, IV-17, IV-23, IV-25
to spare ....................................................... IV-86, IV-87
total LD capacity ................................................... IV-80
total pool..................................................... IV-65, IV-79
total RANK capacity ........................................... IV-129
total unused RANK capacity ............................... IV-129
trap information button........................................ IV-166
trap sense interval ................................................ IV-167
trap transmission place ........................................ IV-166
tree view .............................................................. IV-209
U
unbinding a pool .................................................... IV-26
unbinding logical disks.......................................... IV-56
unbinding pool or RANK ............................... III-7, III-8
unlocking license ............................................ IV-3, IV-5
unused ................................................................... IV-92
unused disk list view ........................................... IV-101
unused PD .................................................. IV-23, IV-86
used capacity ......................................................... IV-95
user available region........................IV-21, IV-40, IV-68
user definition file ............................................... IV-158
user level ................................................................. IV-6
V
virtual medium .................................................I-18, I-22
W
way of binding the logical disks ............................ IV-39
Windows.......................... IV-49, IV-76, IV-127, IV-186
with pool rebuilding .............................................. IV-23
without pool rebuilding ......................................... IV-22
WN ...................... IV-49, IV-76, IV-127, IV-186, 37, 38
WWN ...............................................................I-35, I-36
WWN mode...... IV-28, IV-183, IV-188, IV-210, IV-213
WWNN................................................................ IV-188
WWPN ......................................IV-188, IV-190, IV-191

50



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V1.2 (40-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Copy, Annotate, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res
Create Date                     : 2004:10:18 00:12:24Z
Modify Date                     : 2004:11:12 13:44:50+09:00
Subject                         : IS007-10E
Page Count                      : 340
Creation Date                   : 2004:10:18 00:12:24Z
Mod Date                        : 2004:11:12 13:44:50+09:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Author                          : NEC Corporation
Metadata Date                   : 2004:11:12 13:44:50+09:00
Title                           : NEC Storage Manager Configuration Setting Tool User's Manual (GUI)
Description                     : IS007-10E
Creator                         : NEC Corporation
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : OneColumn
Has XFA                         : No
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu